pallet transfer system 2 · pallet orientation is maintained throughout the system. this simplifies...
TRANSCRIPT
1
Pallet Transfer SystemHFL 2002-S
SystemOverview
Transfer Pallets
Linear Tracks
Corners
Gating System
Pallet Stops ampPallet Lifts
Table Modules
Manual Workstation
Coding ampAccessories
Specifications amp Technical Data
Lanco Integrated12 Thomas DriveWestbrook ME 04092 USATel +1 207 773-2060Fax +1 207 773-2021E-Mail infolanconet
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
Lanco Integrated EuropeMontage- und ZufuumlhrtechnikRosenstraszlige 1573650 WinterbachGermanyPhone +49 7181 707 0Fax +49 7181 707 170E-Mail infodelanconet
Lanco Integrated Asia10F Goodman Shatin Logistics CentrePhase 16 Wong Chuk Yeung Street NTHong KongPhone +852 2866 8002Fax +852 2866 8986E-Mail infoasialanconet
System Overview 1-1HFL 2002-S
Overview HFL 2002-S Transfer SystemThe HFL 2002-S Transfer System is an efficient modular non-synchronous pallet transfer platform for material handlingassembly and test systems It is suitable for creating leanmanufacturing cells and for building semi or fully automaticsystems
ExpandableThe modularity of the HFL 2002-S Transfer System makes iteasy to expand or contract as production demands changeCustomers can initially create a semi-automatic system for smallruns or low speeds and later add more automation as productionrequirements increase
ModularSystem elements can be rearranged or redeployed as product life cycles change
Two Guide Systems in Onebull Central guidance with center rail
for turns and precise multiple-stop pallet positioningor
bull Side guidancefor general pallet conveyance
EconomicalThe HFL 2002-S Transfer System is economical to operatewith a significant reduction in motor power consumption due to
bull Belt travel over rollers reducing wear and particulate generation
bull Efficient motor and gearbox combination
Fast amp EfficientUnique in the industry the HFL 2002-S Transfer System makes themost of cycle time by utilizing multiple stop positions andormultiple parts on a single pallet This feature often eliminates theneed for duplicate stations to make rate thus reducing the overallcost of automation
Ease of MaintenanceThe HFL 2002-S Transfer System is maintenance-friendly LANCOkeeps all component parts including endless transport belts in stockThe drive and automatic belt-tensioner mechanisms are designed toallow a belt change in less than 60 seconds
Lanco Empowering Global Assembly
System Overview 1-2HFL 2002-S
System ComponentsTransfer Pallets
Depending upon system width B (200 300 mm) a variety of transferpallet lengths are availableB = 200 mm Length 250 300 350 400 450 500 mmB = 250 mm Length 300 350 400 450 500 mmB = 300 mm Length 350 400 450 500 mmEach pallet comes with a shock-absorbing bumper and 2 guide pinsused for stopping at stations and guiding through corners and gatedturns More positioning pins can be added to the pallet for multiple-stopping capability thus reducing cycle time between operations
Linear Tracks amp Corner Modules
Linear Tracks and Corner Modules are the basic building blocks of theHFL 2002-S Transfer System Linear Tracks are mounted either onfloor or table stands and carry pallets in a single direction through thevarious workstations Each section is equipped with two belts that runfreely over rollers to move the pallets A single drive mechanismmounted below the track can be positioned anywhere along its lengthEach drive mechanism has an automatic belt tensioner and is designedto allow belt replacement in less than 60 seconds A single fixed-speedmotor powers either a single track or multiple tracks in line Alsoavailable is a two-speed motor that provides pallet deceleration andacceleration through the stops
One Corner Module turns the pallet 90 degrees between Linear TracksTwo combine to reverse pallet direction in a very short radius Eachturn maintains pallet orientation so that automation and pallet codepositioning remain the same on either side of the line
Spur Tracks amp Bridge Tracks
Standard Spur Tracks and Bridge Tracks supplied with InOut PalletGating hardware for traffic control are used to direct pallets away fromthe system loop Spur Track work areas can be perpendicular(Magazines) or parallel (Parallel Tracks) to the line By simply swappingthe In amp Out Gates the pallet can be directed to enter the ldquoexitrdquo of theSpur Track thus allowing ldquobatch processingrdquo or cyclic repetitionsthrough the stations This feature also reverses the pallet orientation incase access from the opposite side is desirableInternal Bridge Tracks can be used to divert pallets and bypass certainstations or sections on a loop External Bridge Tracks can be used tocreate unlimited custom spur configurations depending upon the systemneed
Pallet StopsStandard and Shock-Absorbing Pallet Stops mount directly to thetransfer system and can be combined with Pallet Lifting devices toprovide support for high-load applications
System Overview 1-3HFL 2002-S
System Gating ExamplesSystem Flexibility
A variety of pallet switching and diverting options are possible using the IN OUT Pallet Gating system(page 5-1) in conjunction with Spur Tracks (page 5-1) or Bridge Tracks (page 5-6)
The ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) is identified using a Pallet Coding System(Section 9) The ldquoidentityrdquo of a pallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at each pointin the system
Same Operation Varying Production Quantity
Shown is portion of a line using two perpendicular SpurTracks (Magazines) to perform identical operations onthe same product Pallets worked on in the firstMagazine bypass the second and visa versa Thisconfiguration provides a way to efficiently increase theproduction rate of these operations when the stationtasks cannot be further divided Simply add an operatorat the second Magazine
Same Product Multiple Operations
Shown is a portion of a line using two perpendicular SpurTracks (Magazines) to perform different operations onthe same product In this case Pallets enter bothMagazines
Multiple Products Same Line
This example demonstrates the versatility of the HFL2002-S Transfer System to run more than one producton the same line By coding the pallet (either mechanicalor electrical) the system can be programmed so thateach Spur Track receives only the pallets containing theproduct it needs for that operation In this case Pallet Abypasses the second Magazine and Pallet B bypassesthe first
Bypassing with Bridge Tracks
A variation on the previous example this configurationdemonstrates the system loop bypass possibility using aBridge Track Pallet ldquoCrdquo is shown being diverted to theopposite side of the line This feature can be used toassemble different parts simultaneously on the sameline to set up multi-passes through stations or to simplyand efficiently divert reject product into rework areas
System Overview 1-4HFL 2002-S
System Assembly Steps
STEP 1
Select a system width and Transfer Pallet SizeBased upon the transport needs of the product
B = 200 250 or 300 mm Transfer Pallet Section 2
STEP 2
Select System Modules Length of Track Modules (Single amp Double) for Main Loop Spur Tracks (Magazine amp Parallel) Bridge Tracks Section 3
STEP 3
Select Corner and Gating Modules 90ordm or 180ordm Corners Section 4 Spur Track Forward amp Reverse Gating Section 5 Bridge Track Gating Section 5
STEP 4
Select Accessories Pallet Stops amp Lifting Device Section 6 Table Modules Section 7 Safety Guarding Section 7 Manual Workstation Section 8 Pallet Coding System Section 9 Motor Controls amp Other Accessories Section 9
Your System is now ready to orderCall us at the Lanco office nearest you See Page 1-6
System Overview 1-5HFL 2002-S
System Application Examples
The HFL 2002-S Transfer System has the flexibility to start simply and to expand or increase automation asproduction requirements change The modularity of the system makes layout changes or re-deployment ofmodules for new programs easy to do Here are just a few of the types of configurations possible usingLancorsquos HFL 2002-S Transfer System components
System Overview 1-6HFL 2002-S
Worldwide Offices
wwwlanconet
Americas
Lanco Integrated12 Thomas DriveWestbrook ME 04092 USATEL +1 207 773 2060FAX +1 207 773 2021Email infolanconet
Europe
Lanco Integrated EuropeMontage- und ZufuumlhrtechnikRosenstrasse 1573650 WinterbachGermanyTEL +49 7181 707 0FAX +49 7181 707 170Email infodelanconet
Asia
Lanco Integrated Asia10F Goodman Shatin Logistics CentrePhase 16 Wong Chuk Yeung Street NTHong KongTEL +852 2866 8002FAX +852 2866 8986Email infoasialanconet
Pallets 2-1HFL 2002-SHFL 2002-S
Transfer Pallets carry workpieces from station to stationPallets are made from precision flat aluminum plate with asuper-hardcoat for durability Customer-supplied fixturetooling holds the workpiece to the pallet
Pallets are side-guided along open track sections and center-guided through stops and in corner or gating turns thereforepallet orientation is maintained throughout the system Thissimplifies pallet code positioning (all codes are on the sameside) and allows for any line reconfiguration to occur (stationscan be moved freely from side to side)
Pallets can be indexed through a station by simply stoppingon each pallet pin thus enabling multiple parts to be carriedand processed on a single pallet This feature decreases thedistance between parts and therefore the transfer timebetween operations It also simplifies working on more thanone part at a time if the station cycle time requires it Finallyindexing a pallet can also save an axis of motion for pick andplace operations from pallet nest to pallet nest All of thesefeatures contribute to lower cycle times and simplerlower-cost automation
Transfer Pallets come complete with two (2) Guide Pins andmounting hardware and a leading edge bumper
Ordering Information
Transfer Pallets
Standard Pallet sizes are shown above Custom sizes are available upon request
Standard Pallet Sizes
W T - - 0 0 0 0
System Width B 200mm 2 0250mm 2 5300mm 3 0
Pallet Length L 250mm 2 5300mm 3 0350mm 3 5400mm 4 0450mm 4 5500mm 5 0
13
Pallet Length Pallet Width B
L 200 250 300
250300350400450500
System Overview 1-1HFL 2002-S
Overview HFL 2002-S Transfer SystemThe HFL 2002-S Transfer System is an efficient modular non-synchronous pallet transfer platform for material handlingassembly and test systems It is suitable for creating leanmanufacturing cells and for building semi or fully automaticsystems
ExpandableThe modularity of the HFL 2002-S Transfer System makes iteasy to expand or contract as production demands changeCustomers can initially create a semi-automatic system for smallruns or low speeds and later add more automation as productionrequirements increase
ModularSystem elements can be rearranged or redeployed as product life cycles change
Two Guide Systems in Onebull Central guidance with center rail
for turns and precise multiple-stop pallet positioningor
bull Side guidancefor general pallet conveyance
EconomicalThe HFL 2002-S Transfer System is economical to operatewith a significant reduction in motor power consumption due to
bull Belt travel over rollers reducing wear and particulate generation
bull Efficient motor and gearbox combination
Fast amp EfficientUnique in the industry the HFL 2002-S Transfer System makes themost of cycle time by utilizing multiple stop positions andormultiple parts on a single pallet This feature often eliminates theneed for duplicate stations to make rate thus reducing the overallcost of automation
Ease of MaintenanceThe HFL 2002-S Transfer System is maintenance-friendly LANCOkeeps all component parts including endless transport belts in stockThe drive and automatic belt-tensioner mechanisms are designed toallow a belt change in less than 60 seconds
Lanco Empowering Global Assembly
System Overview 1-2HFL 2002-S
System ComponentsTransfer Pallets
Depending upon system width B (200 300 mm) a variety of transferpallet lengths are availableB = 200 mm Length 250 300 350 400 450 500 mmB = 250 mm Length 300 350 400 450 500 mmB = 300 mm Length 350 400 450 500 mmEach pallet comes with a shock-absorbing bumper and 2 guide pinsused for stopping at stations and guiding through corners and gatedturns More positioning pins can be added to the pallet for multiple-stopping capability thus reducing cycle time between operations
Linear Tracks amp Corner Modules
Linear Tracks and Corner Modules are the basic building blocks of theHFL 2002-S Transfer System Linear Tracks are mounted either onfloor or table stands and carry pallets in a single direction through thevarious workstations Each section is equipped with two belts that runfreely over rollers to move the pallets A single drive mechanismmounted below the track can be positioned anywhere along its lengthEach drive mechanism has an automatic belt tensioner and is designedto allow belt replacement in less than 60 seconds A single fixed-speedmotor powers either a single track or multiple tracks in line Alsoavailable is a two-speed motor that provides pallet deceleration andacceleration through the stops
One Corner Module turns the pallet 90 degrees between Linear TracksTwo combine to reverse pallet direction in a very short radius Eachturn maintains pallet orientation so that automation and pallet codepositioning remain the same on either side of the line
Spur Tracks amp Bridge Tracks
Standard Spur Tracks and Bridge Tracks supplied with InOut PalletGating hardware for traffic control are used to direct pallets away fromthe system loop Spur Track work areas can be perpendicular(Magazines) or parallel (Parallel Tracks) to the line By simply swappingthe In amp Out Gates the pallet can be directed to enter the ldquoexitrdquo of theSpur Track thus allowing ldquobatch processingrdquo or cyclic repetitionsthrough the stations This feature also reverses the pallet orientation incase access from the opposite side is desirableInternal Bridge Tracks can be used to divert pallets and bypass certainstations or sections on a loop External Bridge Tracks can be used tocreate unlimited custom spur configurations depending upon the systemneed
Pallet StopsStandard and Shock-Absorbing Pallet Stops mount directly to thetransfer system and can be combined with Pallet Lifting devices toprovide support for high-load applications
System Overview 1-3HFL 2002-S
System Gating ExamplesSystem Flexibility
A variety of pallet switching and diverting options are possible using the IN OUT Pallet Gating system(page 5-1) in conjunction with Spur Tracks (page 5-1) or Bridge Tracks (page 5-6)
The ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) is identified using a Pallet Coding System(Section 9) The ldquoidentityrdquo of a pallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at each pointin the system
Same Operation Varying Production Quantity
Shown is portion of a line using two perpendicular SpurTracks (Magazines) to perform identical operations onthe same product Pallets worked on in the firstMagazine bypass the second and visa versa Thisconfiguration provides a way to efficiently increase theproduction rate of these operations when the stationtasks cannot be further divided Simply add an operatorat the second Magazine
Same Product Multiple Operations
Shown is a portion of a line using two perpendicular SpurTracks (Magazines) to perform different operations onthe same product In this case Pallets enter bothMagazines
Multiple Products Same Line
This example demonstrates the versatility of the HFL2002-S Transfer System to run more than one producton the same line By coding the pallet (either mechanicalor electrical) the system can be programmed so thateach Spur Track receives only the pallets containing theproduct it needs for that operation In this case Pallet Abypasses the second Magazine and Pallet B bypassesthe first
Bypassing with Bridge Tracks
A variation on the previous example this configurationdemonstrates the system loop bypass possibility using aBridge Track Pallet ldquoCrdquo is shown being diverted to theopposite side of the line This feature can be used toassemble different parts simultaneously on the sameline to set up multi-passes through stations or to simplyand efficiently divert reject product into rework areas
System Overview 1-4HFL 2002-S
System Assembly Steps
STEP 1
Select a system width and Transfer Pallet SizeBased upon the transport needs of the product
B = 200 250 or 300 mm Transfer Pallet Section 2
STEP 2
Select System Modules Length of Track Modules (Single amp Double) for Main Loop Spur Tracks (Magazine amp Parallel) Bridge Tracks Section 3
STEP 3
Select Corner and Gating Modules 90ordm or 180ordm Corners Section 4 Spur Track Forward amp Reverse Gating Section 5 Bridge Track Gating Section 5
STEP 4
Select Accessories Pallet Stops amp Lifting Device Section 6 Table Modules Section 7 Safety Guarding Section 7 Manual Workstation Section 8 Pallet Coding System Section 9 Motor Controls amp Other Accessories Section 9
Your System is now ready to orderCall us at the Lanco office nearest you See Page 1-6
System Overview 1-5HFL 2002-S
System Application Examples
The HFL 2002-S Transfer System has the flexibility to start simply and to expand or increase automation asproduction requirements change The modularity of the system makes layout changes or re-deployment ofmodules for new programs easy to do Here are just a few of the types of configurations possible usingLancorsquos HFL 2002-S Transfer System components
System Overview 1-6HFL 2002-S
Worldwide Offices
wwwlanconet
Americas
Lanco Integrated12 Thomas DriveWestbrook ME 04092 USATEL +1 207 773 2060FAX +1 207 773 2021Email infolanconet
Europe
Lanco Integrated EuropeMontage- und ZufuumlhrtechnikRosenstrasse 1573650 WinterbachGermanyTEL +49 7181 707 0FAX +49 7181 707 170Email infodelanconet
Asia
Lanco Integrated Asia10F Goodman Shatin Logistics CentrePhase 16 Wong Chuk Yeung Street NTHong KongTEL +852 2866 8002FAX +852 2866 8986Email infoasialanconet
Pallets 2-1HFL 2002-SHFL 2002-S
Transfer Pallets carry workpieces from station to stationPallets are made from precision flat aluminum plate with asuper-hardcoat for durability Customer-supplied fixturetooling holds the workpiece to the pallet
Pallets are side-guided along open track sections and center-guided through stops and in corner or gating turns thereforepallet orientation is maintained throughout the system Thissimplifies pallet code positioning (all codes are on the sameside) and allows for any line reconfiguration to occur (stationscan be moved freely from side to side)
Pallets can be indexed through a station by simply stoppingon each pallet pin thus enabling multiple parts to be carriedand processed on a single pallet This feature decreases thedistance between parts and therefore the transfer timebetween operations It also simplifies working on more thanone part at a time if the station cycle time requires it Finallyindexing a pallet can also save an axis of motion for pick andplace operations from pallet nest to pallet nest All of thesefeatures contribute to lower cycle times and simplerlower-cost automation
Transfer Pallets come complete with two (2) Guide Pins andmounting hardware and a leading edge bumper
Ordering Information
Transfer Pallets
Standard Pallet sizes are shown above Custom sizes are available upon request
Standard Pallet Sizes
W T - - 0 0 0 0
System Width B 200mm 2 0250mm 2 5300mm 3 0
Pallet Length L 250mm 2 5300mm 3 0350mm 3 5400mm 4 0450mm 4 5500mm 5 0
13
Pallet Length Pallet Width B
L 200 250 300
250300350400450500
System Overview 1-2HFL 2002-S
System ComponentsTransfer Pallets
Depending upon system width B (200 300 mm) a variety of transferpallet lengths are availableB = 200 mm Length 250 300 350 400 450 500 mmB = 250 mm Length 300 350 400 450 500 mmB = 300 mm Length 350 400 450 500 mmEach pallet comes with a shock-absorbing bumper and 2 guide pinsused for stopping at stations and guiding through corners and gatedturns More positioning pins can be added to the pallet for multiple-stopping capability thus reducing cycle time between operations
Linear Tracks amp Corner Modules
Linear Tracks and Corner Modules are the basic building blocks of theHFL 2002-S Transfer System Linear Tracks are mounted either onfloor or table stands and carry pallets in a single direction through thevarious workstations Each section is equipped with two belts that runfreely over rollers to move the pallets A single drive mechanismmounted below the track can be positioned anywhere along its lengthEach drive mechanism has an automatic belt tensioner and is designedto allow belt replacement in less than 60 seconds A single fixed-speedmotor powers either a single track or multiple tracks in line Alsoavailable is a two-speed motor that provides pallet deceleration andacceleration through the stops
One Corner Module turns the pallet 90 degrees between Linear TracksTwo combine to reverse pallet direction in a very short radius Eachturn maintains pallet orientation so that automation and pallet codepositioning remain the same on either side of the line
Spur Tracks amp Bridge Tracks
Standard Spur Tracks and Bridge Tracks supplied with InOut PalletGating hardware for traffic control are used to direct pallets away fromthe system loop Spur Track work areas can be perpendicular(Magazines) or parallel (Parallel Tracks) to the line By simply swappingthe In amp Out Gates the pallet can be directed to enter the ldquoexitrdquo of theSpur Track thus allowing ldquobatch processingrdquo or cyclic repetitionsthrough the stations This feature also reverses the pallet orientation incase access from the opposite side is desirableInternal Bridge Tracks can be used to divert pallets and bypass certainstations or sections on a loop External Bridge Tracks can be used tocreate unlimited custom spur configurations depending upon the systemneed
Pallet StopsStandard and Shock-Absorbing Pallet Stops mount directly to thetransfer system and can be combined with Pallet Lifting devices toprovide support for high-load applications
System Overview 1-3HFL 2002-S
System Gating ExamplesSystem Flexibility
A variety of pallet switching and diverting options are possible using the IN OUT Pallet Gating system(page 5-1) in conjunction with Spur Tracks (page 5-1) or Bridge Tracks (page 5-6)
The ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) is identified using a Pallet Coding System(Section 9) The ldquoidentityrdquo of a pallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at each pointin the system
Same Operation Varying Production Quantity
Shown is portion of a line using two perpendicular SpurTracks (Magazines) to perform identical operations onthe same product Pallets worked on in the firstMagazine bypass the second and visa versa Thisconfiguration provides a way to efficiently increase theproduction rate of these operations when the stationtasks cannot be further divided Simply add an operatorat the second Magazine
Same Product Multiple Operations
Shown is a portion of a line using two perpendicular SpurTracks (Magazines) to perform different operations onthe same product In this case Pallets enter bothMagazines
Multiple Products Same Line
This example demonstrates the versatility of the HFL2002-S Transfer System to run more than one producton the same line By coding the pallet (either mechanicalor electrical) the system can be programmed so thateach Spur Track receives only the pallets containing theproduct it needs for that operation In this case Pallet Abypasses the second Magazine and Pallet B bypassesthe first
Bypassing with Bridge Tracks
A variation on the previous example this configurationdemonstrates the system loop bypass possibility using aBridge Track Pallet ldquoCrdquo is shown being diverted to theopposite side of the line This feature can be used toassemble different parts simultaneously on the sameline to set up multi-passes through stations or to simplyand efficiently divert reject product into rework areas
System Overview 1-4HFL 2002-S
System Assembly Steps
STEP 1
Select a system width and Transfer Pallet SizeBased upon the transport needs of the product
B = 200 250 or 300 mm Transfer Pallet Section 2
STEP 2
Select System Modules Length of Track Modules (Single amp Double) for Main Loop Spur Tracks (Magazine amp Parallel) Bridge Tracks Section 3
STEP 3
Select Corner and Gating Modules 90ordm or 180ordm Corners Section 4 Spur Track Forward amp Reverse Gating Section 5 Bridge Track Gating Section 5
STEP 4
Select Accessories Pallet Stops amp Lifting Device Section 6 Table Modules Section 7 Safety Guarding Section 7 Manual Workstation Section 8 Pallet Coding System Section 9 Motor Controls amp Other Accessories Section 9
Your System is now ready to orderCall us at the Lanco office nearest you See Page 1-6
System Overview 1-5HFL 2002-S
System Application Examples
The HFL 2002-S Transfer System has the flexibility to start simply and to expand or increase automation asproduction requirements change The modularity of the system makes layout changes or re-deployment ofmodules for new programs easy to do Here are just a few of the types of configurations possible usingLancorsquos HFL 2002-S Transfer System components
System Overview 1-6HFL 2002-S
Worldwide Offices
wwwlanconet
Americas
Lanco Integrated12 Thomas DriveWestbrook ME 04092 USATEL +1 207 773 2060FAX +1 207 773 2021Email infolanconet
Europe
Lanco Integrated EuropeMontage- und ZufuumlhrtechnikRosenstrasse 1573650 WinterbachGermanyTEL +49 7181 707 0FAX +49 7181 707 170Email infodelanconet
Asia
Lanco Integrated Asia10F Goodman Shatin Logistics CentrePhase 16 Wong Chuk Yeung Street NTHong KongTEL +852 2866 8002FAX +852 2866 8986Email infoasialanconet
Pallets 2-1HFL 2002-SHFL 2002-S
Transfer Pallets carry workpieces from station to stationPallets are made from precision flat aluminum plate with asuper-hardcoat for durability Customer-supplied fixturetooling holds the workpiece to the pallet
Pallets are side-guided along open track sections and center-guided through stops and in corner or gating turns thereforepallet orientation is maintained throughout the system Thissimplifies pallet code positioning (all codes are on the sameside) and allows for any line reconfiguration to occur (stationscan be moved freely from side to side)
Pallets can be indexed through a station by simply stoppingon each pallet pin thus enabling multiple parts to be carriedand processed on a single pallet This feature decreases thedistance between parts and therefore the transfer timebetween operations It also simplifies working on more thanone part at a time if the station cycle time requires it Finallyindexing a pallet can also save an axis of motion for pick andplace operations from pallet nest to pallet nest All of thesefeatures contribute to lower cycle times and simplerlower-cost automation
Transfer Pallets come complete with two (2) Guide Pins andmounting hardware and a leading edge bumper
Ordering Information
Transfer Pallets
Standard Pallet sizes are shown above Custom sizes are available upon request
Standard Pallet Sizes
W T - - 0 0 0 0
System Width B 200mm 2 0250mm 2 5300mm 3 0
Pallet Length L 250mm 2 5300mm 3 0350mm 3 5400mm 4 0450mm 4 5500mm 5 0
13
Pallet Length Pallet Width B
L 200 250 300
250300350400450500
System Overview 1-3HFL 2002-S
System Gating ExamplesSystem Flexibility
A variety of pallet switching and diverting options are possible using the IN OUT Pallet Gating system(page 5-1) in conjunction with Spur Tracks (page 5-1) or Bridge Tracks (page 5-6)
The ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) is identified using a Pallet Coding System(Section 9) The ldquoidentityrdquo of a pallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at each pointin the system
Same Operation Varying Production Quantity
Shown is portion of a line using two perpendicular SpurTracks (Magazines) to perform identical operations onthe same product Pallets worked on in the firstMagazine bypass the second and visa versa Thisconfiguration provides a way to efficiently increase theproduction rate of these operations when the stationtasks cannot be further divided Simply add an operatorat the second Magazine
Same Product Multiple Operations
Shown is a portion of a line using two perpendicular SpurTracks (Magazines) to perform different operations onthe same product In this case Pallets enter bothMagazines
Multiple Products Same Line
This example demonstrates the versatility of the HFL2002-S Transfer System to run more than one producton the same line By coding the pallet (either mechanicalor electrical) the system can be programmed so thateach Spur Track receives only the pallets containing theproduct it needs for that operation In this case Pallet Abypasses the second Magazine and Pallet B bypassesthe first
Bypassing with Bridge Tracks
A variation on the previous example this configurationdemonstrates the system loop bypass possibility using aBridge Track Pallet ldquoCrdquo is shown being diverted to theopposite side of the line This feature can be used toassemble different parts simultaneously on the sameline to set up multi-passes through stations or to simplyand efficiently divert reject product into rework areas
System Overview 1-4HFL 2002-S
System Assembly Steps
STEP 1
Select a system width and Transfer Pallet SizeBased upon the transport needs of the product
B = 200 250 or 300 mm Transfer Pallet Section 2
STEP 2
Select System Modules Length of Track Modules (Single amp Double) for Main Loop Spur Tracks (Magazine amp Parallel) Bridge Tracks Section 3
STEP 3
Select Corner and Gating Modules 90ordm or 180ordm Corners Section 4 Spur Track Forward amp Reverse Gating Section 5 Bridge Track Gating Section 5
STEP 4
Select Accessories Pallet Stops amp Lifting Device Section 6 Table Modules Section 7 Safety Guarding Section 7 Manual Workstation Section 8 Pallet Coding System Section 9 Motor Controls amp Other Accessories Section 9
Your System is now ready to orderCall us at the Lanco office nearest you See Page 1-6
System Overview 1-5HFL 2002-S
System Application Examples
The HFL 2002-S Transfer System has the flexibility to start simply and to expand or increase automation asproduction requirements change The modularity of the system makes layout changes or re-deployment ofmodules for new programs easy to do Here are just a few of the types of configurations possible usingLancorsquos HFL 2002-S Transfer System components
System Overview 1-6HFL 2002-S
Worldwide Offices
wwwlanconet
Americas
Lanco Integrated12 Thomas DriveWestbrook ME 04092 USATEL +1 207 773 2060FAX +1 207 773 2021Email infolanconet
Europe
Lanco Integrated EuropeMontage- und ZufuumlhrtechnikRosenstrasse 1573650 WinterbachGermanyTEL +49 7181 707 0FAX +49 7181 707 170Email infodelanconet
Asia
Lanco Integrated Asia10F Goodman Shatin Logistics CentrePhase 16 Wong Chuk Yeung Street NTHong KongTEL +852 2866 8002FAX +852 2866 8986Email infoasialanconet
Pallets 2-1HFL 2002-SHFL 2002-S
Transfer Pallets carry workpieces from station to stationPallets are made from precision flat aluminum plate with asuper-hardcoat for durability Customer-supplied fixturetooling holds the workpiece to the pallet
Pallets are side-guided along open track sections and center-guided through stops and in corner or gating turns thereforepallet orientation is maintained throughout the system Thissimplifies pallet code positioning (all codes are on the sameside) and allows for any line reconfiguration to occur (stationscan be moved freely from side to side)
Pallets can be indexed through a station by simply stoppingon each pallet pin thus enabling multiple parts to be carriedand processed on a single pallet This feature decreases thedistance between parts and therefore the transfer timebetween operations It also simplifies working on more thanone part at a time if the station cycle time requires it Finallyindexing a pallet can also save an axis of motion for pick andplace operations from pallet nest to pallet nest All of thesefeatures contribute to lower cycle times and simplerlower-cost automation
Transfer Pallets come complete with two (2) Guide Pins andmounting hardware and a leading edge bumper
Ordering Information
Transfer Pallets
Standard Pallet sizes are shown above Custom sizes are available upon request
Standard Pallet Sizes
W T - - 0 0 0 0
System Width B 200mm 2 0250mm 2 5300mm 3 0
Pallet Length L 250mm 2 5300mm 3 0350mm 3 5400mm 4 0450mm 4 5500mm 5 0
13
Pallet Length Pallet Width B
L 200 250 300
250300350400450500
System Overview 1-4HFL 2002-S
System Assembly Steps
STEP 1
Select a system width and Transfer Pallet SizeBased upon the transport needs of the product
B = 200 250 or 300 mm Transfer Pallet Section 2
STEP 2
Select System Modules Length of Track Modules (Single amp Double) for Main Loop Spur Tracks (Magazine amp Parallel) Bridge Tracks Section 3
STEP 3
Select Corner and Gating Modules 90ordm or 180ordm Corners Section 4 Spur Track Forward amp Reverse Gating Section 5 Bridge Track Gating Section 5
STEP 4
Select Accessories Pallet Stops amp Lifting Device Section 6 Table Modules Section 7 Safety Guarding Section 7 Manual Workstation Section 8 Pallet Coding System Section 9 Motor Controls amp Other Accessories Section 9
Your System is now ready to orderCall us at the Lanco office nearest you See Page 1-6
System Overview 1-5HFL 2002-S
System Application Examples
The HFL 2002-S Transfer System has the flexibility to start simply and to expand or increase automation asproduction requirements change The modularity of the system makes layout changes or re-deployment ofmodules for new programs easy to do Here are just a few of the types of configurations possible usingLancorsquos HFL 2002-S Transfer System components
System Overview 1-6HFL 2002-S
Worldwide Offices
wwwlanconet
Americas
Lanco Integrated12 Thomas DriveWestbrook ME 04092 USATEL +1 207 773 2060FAX +1 207 773 2021Email infolanconet
Europe
Lanco Integrated EuropeMontage- und ZufuumlhrtechnikRosenstrasse 1573650 WinterbachGermanyTEL +49 7181 707 0FAX +49 7181 707 170Email infodelanconet
Asia
Lanco Integrated Asia10F Goodman Shatin Logistics CentrePhase 16 Wong Chuk Yeung Street NTHong KongTEL +852 2866 8002FAX +852 2866 8986Email infoasialanconet
Pallets 2-1HFL 2002-SHFL 2002-S
Transfer Pallets carry workpieces from station to stationPallets are made from precision flat aluminum plate with asuper-hardcoat for durability Customer-supplied fixturetooling holds the workpiece to the pallet
Pallets are side-guided along open track sections and center-guided through stops and in corner or gating turns thereforepallet orientation is maintained throughout the system Thissimplifies pallet code positioning (all codes are on the sameside) and allows for any line reconfiguration to occur (stationscan be moved freely from side to side)
Pallets can be indexed through a station by simply stoppingon each pallet pin thus enabling multiple parts to be carriedand processed on a single pallet This feature decreases thedistance between parts and therefore the transfer timebetween operations It also simplifies working on more thanone part at a time if the station cycle time requires it Finallyindexing a pallet can also save an axis of motion for pick andplace operations from pallet nest to pallet nest All of thesefeatures contribute to lower cycle times and simplerlower-cost automation
Transfer Pallets come complete with two (2) Guide Pins andmounting hardware and a leading edge bumper
Ordering Information
Transfer Pallets
Standard Pallet sizes are shown above Custom sizes are available upon request
Standard Pallet Sizes
W T - - 0 0 0 0
System Width B 200mm 2 0250mm 2 5300mm 3 0
Pallet Length L 250mm 2 5300mm 3 0350mm 3 5400mm 4 0450mm 4 5500mm 5 0
13
Pallet Length Pallet Width B
L 200 250 300
250300350400450500
System Overview 1-5HFL 2002-S
System Application Examples
The HFL 2002-S Transfer System has the flexibility to start simply and to expand or increase automation asproduction requirements change The modularity of the system makes layout changes or re-deployment ofmodules for new programs easy to do Here are just a few of the types of configurations possible usingLancorsquos HFL 2002-S Transfer System components
System Overview 1-6HFL 2002-S
Worldwide Offices
wwwlanconet
Americas
Lanco Integrated12 Thomas DriveWestbrook ME 04092 USATEL +1 207 773 2060FAX +1 207 773 2021Email infolanconet
Europe
Lanco Integrated EuropeMontage- und ZufuumlhrtechnikRosenstrasse 1573650 WinterbachGermanyTEL +49 7181 707 0FAX +49 7181 707 170Email infodelanconet
Asia
Lanco Integrated Asia10F Goodman Shatin Logistics CentrePhase 16 Wong Chuk Yeung Street NTHong KongTEL +852 2866 8002FAX +852 2866 8986Email infoasialanconet
Pallets 2-1HFL 2002-SHFL 2002-S
Transfer Pallets carry workpieces from station to stationPallets are made from precision flat aluminum plate with asuper-hardcoat for durability Customer-supplied fixturetooling holds the workpiece to the pallet
Pallets are side-guided along open track sections and center-guided through stops and in corner or gating turns thereforepallet orientation is maintained throughout the system Thissimplifies pallet code positioning (all codes are on the sameside) and allows for any line reconfiguration to occur (stationscan be moved freely from side to side)
Pallets can be indexed through a station by simply stoppingon each pallet pin thus enabling multiple parts to be carriedand processed on a single pallet This feature decreases thedistance between parts and therefore the transfer timebetween operations It also simplifies working on more thanone part at a time if the station cycle time requires it Finallyindexing a pallet can also save an axis of motion for pick andplace operations from pallet nest to pallet nest All of thesefeatures contribute to lower cycle times and simplerlower-cost automation
Transfer Pallets come complete with two (2) Guide Pins andmounting hardware and a leading edge bumper
Ordering Information
Transfer Pallets
Standard Pallet sizes are shown above Custom sizes are available upon request
Standard Pallet Sizes
W T - - 0 0 0 0
System Width B 200mm 2 0250mm 2 5300mm 3 0
Pallet Length L 250mm 2 5300mm 3 0350mm 3 5400mm 4 0450mm 4 5500mm 5 0
13
Pallet Length Pallet Width B
L 200 250 300
250300350400450500
System Overview 1-6HFL 2002-S
Worldwide Offices
wwwlanconet
Americas
Lanco Integrated12 Thomas DriveWestbrook ME 04092 USATEL +1 207 773 2060FAX +1 207 773 2021Email infolanconet
Europe
Lanco Integrated EuropeMontage- und ZufuumlhrtechnikRosenstrasse 1573650 WinterbachGermanyTEL +49 7181 707 0FAX +49 7181 707 170Email infodelanconet
Asia
Lanco Integrated Asia10F Goodman Shatin Logistics CentrePhase 16 Wong Chuk Yeung Street NTHong KongTEL +852 2866 8002FAX +852 2866 8986Email infoasialanconet
Pallets 2-1HFL 2002-SHFL 2002-S
Transfer Pallets carry workpieces from station to stationPallets are made from precision flat aluminum plate with asuper-hardcoat for durability Customer-supplied fixturetooling holds the workpiece to the pallet
Pallets are side-guided along open track sections and center-guided through stops and in corner or gating turns thereforepallet orientation is maintained throughout the system Thissimplifies pallet code positioning (all codes are on the sameside) and allows for any line reconfiguration to occur (stationscan be moved freely from side to side)
Pallets can be indexed through a station by simply stoppingon each pallet pin thus enabling multiple parts to be carriedand processed on a single pallet This feature decreases thedistance between parts and therefore the transfer timebetween operations It also simplifies working on more thanone part at a time if the station cycle time requires it Finallyindexing a pallet can also save an axis of motion for pick andplace operations from pallet nest to pallet nest All of thesefeatures contribute to lower cycle times and simplerlower-cost automation
Transfer Pallets come complete with two (2) Guide Pins andmounting hardware and a leading edge bumper
Ordering Information
Transfer Pallets
Standard Pallet sizes are shown above Custom sizes are available upon request
Standard Pallet Sizes
W T - - 0 0 0 0
System Width B 200mm 2 0250mm 2 5300mm 3 0
Pallet Length L 250mm 2 5300mm 3 0350mm 3 5400mm 4 0450mm 4 5500mm 5 0
13
Pallet Length Pallet Width B
L 200 250 300
250300350400450500
Pallets 2-1HFL 2002-SHFL 2002-S
Transfer Pallets carry workpieces from station to stationPallets are made from precision flat aluminum plate with asuper-hardcoat for durability Customer-supplied fixturetooling holds the workpiece to the pallet
Pallets are side-guided along open track sections and center-guided through stops and in corner or gating turns thereforepallet orientation is maintained throughout the system Thissimplifies pallet code positioning (all codes are on the sameside) and allows for any line reconfiguration to occur (stationscan be moved freely from side to side)
Pallets can be indexed through a station by simply stoppingon each pallet pin thus enabling multiple parts to be carriedand processed on a single pallet This feature decreases thedistance between parts and therefore the transfer timebetween operations It also simplifies working on more thanone part at a time if the station cycle time requires it Finallyindexing a pallet can also save an axis of motion for pick andplace operations from pallet nest to pallet nest All of thesefeatures contribute to lower cycle times and simplerlower-cost automation
Transfer Pallets come complete with two (2) Guide Pins andmounting hardware and a leading edge bumper
Ordering Information
Transfer Pallets
Standard Pallet sizes are shown above Custom sizes are available upon request
Standard Pallet Sizes
W T - - 0 0 0 0
System Width B 200mm 2 0250mm 2 5300mm 3 0
Pallet Length L 250mm 2 5300mm 3 0350mm 3 5400mm 4 0450mm 4 5500mm 5 0
13
Pallet Length Pallet Width B
L 200 250 300
250300350400450500
Catalog Outline
HFL2002-S Module Numbering
Obsolete HFL2002-S
HFL2002
Pallet Sizes amp AFH Parts
Pallets 2-2HFL 2002-S
Proper positioning of Guide Pins is dependent on theTransfer Pallet length This will determine the nature ofthe pallet motion during a turn through a corner or gateand the pitch of multiple stopping positions LancorsquosPallet Motion Simulation software is available to assist inproper pin positioning
Minimum Positioning Pin spacing (A) is 20mm forpositioning in Standard Pallet Stops (Chapter 6) and 40mm for a Shock-Absorbing Pallet Stop
Consult Lanco for special pin positions not shown in thechart below
Ordering Information
Pallet Guiding amp Positioning Pins
Pallet Width Pallet Length A (mm)
B L Standard Min-Max Standard Min-Max Standard Min-Max Max
250 50 30-75 100 70-100 100 50-120 40300 50 30-75 150 120-200 100 50-120 25350 50 30-75 200 150-230 100 50-120 20400 50 30-75 230 150-230 120 50-150 20450 75 50-75 230 180-230 145 75-180 20500 100 50-75 230 200-230 170 75-180 20300 60 40-75 120 80-120 120 60-120 55350 60 40-75 180 120-200 110 60-150 40400 60 40-75 230 150-280 110 60-180 30450 60 40-75 280 150-280 110 60-200 30500 75 50-75 280 200-280 145 75-200 30350 75 50-75 150 100-250 125 75-150 70400 75 50-75 200 150-250 125 75-180 50450 75 50-75 250 180-300 125 75-210 45500 75 50-75 300 200-330 125 75-210 40
Z (mm)X (mm) Y (mm)
200
250
300
Part Number Description
1 AFH-A22-01651 Guiding Pin (w Bearing)
2 AFH-A22-02056 Positioning Pin (wout Bearing)
3 AFH-A22-01654 Retainer Standard Pin Spacing
4 AFH-A22-01653 Retainer Close Pin Spacing
5 AFH-A22-01656 Bumper 200 Wide Pallet
6 AFH-A22-01657 Bumper 250 Wide Pallet
7 AFH-A22-01658 Bumper 300 Wide Pallet
Item
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-1
Single Track Module
Single Track Modules are conveyor sections used totransport pallets in a linear direction They are typicallyconnected to other Single Tracks or to Corner Modules forturning pallets 90 or 180 degrees Floor mount tracks serveas the building blocks for Bridge Tracks and Spur TrackModules as well as Manual Workstations (see page 8-1)Table mount tracks are normally combined with StationModules for automatic assembly operations (see page 7-1)
Single Track Modules come complete with Mounts allConveyor Belts connection brackets and One (1) Drive
Standard system dimensions are shown here Customlengths are available on request
Standard speed 250 mms Other speeds are availableStandard voltages are 208 VAC 60 Hz and 400 VAC 50 Hz
Ordering Information
Floor Mounted
Table Mount
FloorManual Workstation Mount
L
B+10
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-2
Lift Gate Track ModuleTrack Mounted
Lift Gate Modules allow access to the inside of a transportsystem loop The Lift Gate takes the place of a standard10 meter Single Track Section between two other TrackSections The hinge hardware mounts to one track sectionand the latch hardware mounts to the other track section
Single Track Modules come complete with Hinge Latchhardware and an optional Gas Spring Assist Cylinder Thebelts on the Lift Gate are powered by the motor drive uniton the adjacent hinge side Track Module Conveyor beltlength is calculated based on the total length of the LiftGate plus the adjacent track section (hinge side) Seebelow
Standard system dimensions are shown here
Standard speed 250 mms Other speeds are availableStandard voltages are 208 VAC 60 Hz and 400 VAC 50 Hz
Ordering Information
Belt Length Calculation
When connecting a Lift Gate to the adjacent SingleTrack Module it is necessary to order two (2) additionalconveyor belts to provide drive to the Lift Gate byspanning both track sections These belts replace theadjacent track belts provided Refer to Page 3-7 toorder the required belts as specified below
L - 150
X+LX
B+10
L
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-20000 Lift Gate Unassisted 200 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20100 Lift Gate Unassisted 250 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20200 Lift Gate Unassisted 300 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20300 Lift Gate Assisted 200 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20400 Lift Gate Assisted 250 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20500 Lift Gate Assisted 300 mm Wide
Lift GateLengthL (mm)
AdjacentTrack LengthX (mm)
Specify 2 BeltsPart Number
(see page 3-7)
1000 500 AHK-112-23450
1000 1000 AHK-112-24450
1000 1500 AHK-112-25450
1000 2000 AHK-112-26450
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-3
Dimensions
Double Track ModuleFloor MountedDouble Track Modules are conveyor sections typically usedto create custom length Compact Loops or Spur TrackModules They can also be combined with Single TracksCorners (90 amp 180 Degree) and Manual Workstations formanual assembly operations (Section 8)
Double Track Modules come complete with Floor Mountsall Conveyor Belts connection brackets and Two (2) DrivesThe two drives can be configured to run in the same oropposite directions
Standard system dimensions are shown here Customlengths available on request
Standard speed 240 mms Other speeds are availableStandard voltage 208 V 60 Hz
Ordering Information
B+10
L
X 100
Module WidthX (mm)
Pallet Width B
200 250 300
Double Track 520 620 720
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-4
StandsNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately
Table MountAll Standard Table Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) when used with Table Modules shown inSection 7 Custom line heights are specified in the part number asshown below in millimeters Line Height is the distance from the floor to the top of the transfer system belt
Floor Mount BasicAll Standard Floor Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) Custom line heights are specified in thepart number as shown below in millimeters
Floor Mount Spur Tracks Double Tracks amp Manual WorkstationAll Standard Floor Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) Custom line heights are specified in thepart number as shown below in millimeters
Intermediate Element without StandIncluded with Standard Track Section Modules For attachment of any of the above Stands to transporttracks where no Intermediate Element is present Specify Part Number based on Track Section width
System WidthB (mm) Part Number Description
200 AFH-A21-01656 Intermediate Element 200
250 AFH-A21-01657 Intermediate Element 250
300 AFH-A21-01658 Intermediate Element 300
H2 H
1
885
X
1000
H2 = 140 mm
H2 = 265 mm
1000
885
Module WidthX (mm)
Pallet Width B
200 250 300
Single Track 520 520 520
Double Track 530 630 730
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-5
DrivesNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately
Standard Track Section Drive Units fall into two categories
Dual Belt w Constant SpeedFor typical track operation Standard belt speed is 250mmsecOther speeds are available
Single Belt w Constant SpeedFor situations in which a track section with a single belt isrequired whether as a dual rail track or single rail(ie Feeder Belts)
The drive unit for Standard Corner Modules is specified below It isused to drive a single belt with constant speed (418 mmsec) andcan also be used to drive Feeder Belts
Drives for Corner Modules (where additional units are needed)
Drives for Track (where additional units are needed)
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-92200 Drive Dual ndash 200 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-92300 Drive Dual ndash 250 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-92400 Drive Dual ndash 300 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93100 Drive Dual ndash 200 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-93200 Drive Dual ndash 250 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-93300 Drive Dual ndash 300 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-92500 Drive Single ndash 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93700 Drive Single ndash 400 VAC 50 Hz
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-92000 Drive Corner ndash 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93300 Drive Corner ndash 400 VAC 50 Hz
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-6
Conveyor BeltsNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately or when combining any Track Modules with Spur Tracks Bridge Tracks or Lift Gates
Ordering Information
Transport track without belt deflecting rollers
LT = 2 x L + 450 mm
Transport track with single pair of belt deflecting rollers at entry exit to Bridge Track
LT = 2 x L + 450 mmBelt lengths up to 25 mm longer can be accommodatedby adjusting a pulley in the drive unit
Transport track with two pair of belt deflecting rollers at entry exit to Spur Tracks
LT = 2 x L + 500 mm
Example
Transport Track Length = 10 m
LT = 2 x L + 450 mmLT = 2 x 1000 + 450 mmLT = 2450 mm
rArrPart No ARR-112-22450
Lanco belts are pre-made and labeled with Part Numberand Belt Length for ease of identification The belt feeddirection is also marked with an arrowStandard Belt Material is highly conductive SieglingExtremultus TT 51-6431-HC Black Polyamide fabricjacket and polyamide foil tension member Other beltmaterials are available for special applications
Combination of multiple transport tracks
It is possible to bridge over multiple transport tracks witha single conveyor belt saving drives This also occurswhen using a Lift Gate Track Module (Page 3-3)
The maximum combined transport track length is 3200 mm
How to order conveyor belts1 Calculate conveyor belt length
2 Specify Part No
L
L
L
HFL 2002-S Corners 4-1
Corner Modules are are typically connected to any Single orDouble Track Module and used to change the pallet directionby 90 or 180 degrees They can be used to form CompactLoops combined with Gate Modules (Chapter 5) to createcustom Spur Tracks or configured with Linear Tracks tomake serpentine or any shape systems
Corner Modules mount to each of the adjacent modules andinclude a belt drive unit angled at 45 degrees to quickly andefficiently transfer a pallet through the turn
Standard speed 418 mmsStandard voltage 208 V 60 Hz
Ordering Information
Corner Module
90ordm Corner Module 180ordm Corner Module
IO Requirements90 Deg Corner 1 Motor180 Deg Corner 2 Motors
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-1
Gating Systems
Gating Systems are an important part of the HFL 2002-STransfer System They allow pallets to be diverted from themain transport loop onto Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
This Section offers the Gating System mechanisms that areused to divert pallets into Spurs or Bridge Tracks Commonexamples of Gating Systems are shown To better clarifyhow these Gates are used it is important to understand thedefinition of Spur Tracks and Bridge Tracks
There are two types of Spur Tracks Magazines with workarea perpendicular to the main loop and Parallel Trackswith work area parallel to the main loop Both can be usedfor manual or automatic workstations By swapping In amp OutGates of a Spur Track a batch-processing cell can becreated that allows cyclic repetitions at the stations Thisalso reverses pallet orientation for access from the oppositeside Note that Spur Tracks can be placed directly on thecorners of a transport loop which helps save floor space
There are two types of Bridge Tracks In-Line Tracksused to bypass operations on a transport loop and Off-LineTracks used to create custom Spur Tracks
Gating Systems mount to Linear Track Modules (Section 3)and include switching gates pallet stops queue sensorsand Corner Modules (for parallel tracks) Pallet Coding(Section 9) is typically required to identify pallets inconjunction with Gating Systems
Overview
Magazine Spur (Middle)With Manual Workstation
Parallel Spur (Right)Reverse Loop
In-Line Bridge Track
Table Module
Corner Module
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-2
Magazine Gating
Magazine Middle Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between its Linear Tracks to the mainloop (ie there is no separation between the In amp Out Gates alongthe main loop track) A 180deg Corner Module (Section 4) fitsperfectly on the opposite end of the Magazine Magazines aretypically used for manual workstations (See page 1-3) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2) queuesensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
Magazine Middle Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Middle GateGate-Only
Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-3
Magazine Gating
Magazine Left Gates connect Magazines that have the minimumdistance possible between their Linear Tracks directly to thecorners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of theMagazine By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine thepallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite sideaccess andor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Left Gates include(1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine Left Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel DirectionPallet Travel
Direction
Magazine Left Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-4
Magazine Right Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between their Linear Tracks directly tothe corners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of whateverlength Double Track Module is used for the Spur By swappingthe In amp Out Gates on the Spur the pallet orientation can berotated (reverse loop) for opposite side access andor to performcyclic repetitions on the Spur stationsMagazine Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine GatingMagazine Right Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Right Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-5
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Middle Gates link Parallel Tracks to the transport loop atthe minimum distance allowed between the Parallel and transportloop tracks (ie there is no separation between the In-Gate andthe Corner to the Linear Track) Parallel tracks can be any length(See page 1-3 for various ways to use Parallel Tracks) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Parallel Track the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsParallel Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel Middle Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Middle Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-6
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Left Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the left cornerof the transport loop (to save space) at the minimum distanceallowed between the Parallel and transport loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesNOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module is included withreversing loopFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Left Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Left Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-7
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Right Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the rightcorner of the transport loop (to save space) at the minimumdistance allowed between the Parallel and loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestationsParallel Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3)queue sensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree CornerModules NOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module isincluded with reversing loop
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Right Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Right Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-8
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel End Gates link Parallel Tracks to the end of the transportloop (to save space) at the minimum distance allowed between theParallel and transport loop tracks Non-reversing Parallel Tracksare as wide as the transport loop (See page 1-3 for various waysto use Parallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on theParallel Track the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop)for opposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel End Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queue sensorsfor traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner Modules TheReverse Loop version includes (2) additional Corner Modules
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel End Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-9
Bridge Tracks can be In-Line (for bypassing operations on a loop)and Off-Line (for building custom Spur Tracks) In-Line BridgeGates connect Bridge Tracks to opposite sides of a transport loopBy swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Bridge Tracks the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsBridge Tracks Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic controlFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gates link custom-sized Spurs anywherealong a Linear Track Module and include (1) pneumaticallyoperated switching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) palletstops and (3) queue sensors for traffic control Custom Spurshave variable separation between the In amp Out Gates therefore anadditional Pallet Stop is included for staging pallet(s) betweenthem This minimizes pallet transfer time through the Bridge
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Modules (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Bridge Track GatingIn-Line Bridge Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
In-Line Bridge Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleForward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-10
Off-Line Bridge Right Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the rightcorner of a transport loop An additional Pallet Stop is included forstaging pallet(s) between the In amp Out Gates This minimizespallet transfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp OutGates on a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverseloop) for access or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Off-Line Bridge Left Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the leftcorner of a transport loop Custom Spurs have variable separationbetween the In amp Out Gates therefore an additional Pallet Stop isincluded for staging pallet(s) between them This minimizes pallettransfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp Out Gateson a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foraccess or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specify
bull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Bridge Track GatingOff-Line Bridge Left Gate
Off-Line Bridge Right Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate Left Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate LeftReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate Right Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate RightReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-1
Track Mounted Pallet Stops
Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
The Track Mounted Pallet Stop mounts directly to the trackprofile and includes an actuated pawl lever that preciselystops the Pallet guide pins Rails secure the pallet position inthe lateral direction An inductive sensor embedded in the railsupport verifies that the pallet pin is in position This allowsstopping on multiple pallet pins or indexing through a stationAn anti-reversing latching pawl can be added to preventupstream-applied loads from moving the pallet backwards inthe stop (see Accessories)
Pallet Stops with Long Guide Rails are used in applicationswhere the spacing between any two pallet posts is 150 mm orless Pallet Stops with Short Guide Rails are used primarilyfor pallet traffic control at gates or anywhere queuing ofpallets needs to be controlled Stops with Short Guide Railsmay also be used to position longer pallets in an automaticstation when the spacing between any two posts is greaterthan 150 mm together with a Supplemental Guide
HD Pallet Stops have a larger release cylinder and arespecified when there is a high back pressure load on the stopBack pressure is a function of pallet weight number of palletsin queue and conveyor belt speed Choose an HD PalletStop when the back pressure load exceeds 180 N
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering InformationIO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HD Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
HD Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Supplemental Guide
AAA-S22-41800 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-41900 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42000 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-42100 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-42200 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42300 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43200 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43300 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43400 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43500 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43600 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43700 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AFH-A22-00623 Supplemental Guide 200 wide
AFH-A22-00633 Supplemental Guide 250 wide
AFH-A22-00643 Supplemental Guide 300 wide
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
| Pallet Length | Pallet Width B | Pallet Width | Pallet Length | X (mm) | Y (mm) | Z (mm) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| L | 200 | 250 | 300 | B | L | Standard | Min-Max | Standard | Min-Max | Max | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250 | 200 | 250 | 50 | 30-75 | 100 | 70-120 | 25 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300 | 300 | 50 | 30-75 | 150 | 120-200 | 25 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 350 | 350 | 50 | 30-75 | 200 | 150-230 | 20 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 400 | 50 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 450 | 75 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250 | 300 | 60 | 30-75 | 120 | 80-160 | 55 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 350 | 60 | 30-75 | 180 | 120-200 | 40 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 60 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 60 | 30-75 | 280 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 280 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300 | 350 | 75 | 30-75 | 200 | 120-250 | 50 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 75 | 30-75 | 200 | 120-250 | 50 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 75 | 30-75 | 250 | 150-300 | 45 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 300 | 150-330 | 40 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| A | H | K | - | 1 | 1 | 2 | - | 2 | Assembly Type | Conveyor Belts | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Belt Length | mm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ( 2 x L ) + 450 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| B (mm) | Part Number | Description | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 200 | AFH-A21-01656 | Intermediate Element 200 | Assembly Type | Intermediate Element | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250 | AFH-A21-01657 | Intermediate Element 250 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300 | AFH-A21-01658 | Intermediate Element 300 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Stand Width | Pallet Width B | Pallet Width | Pallet Length | X (mm) | Y (mm) | Z (mm) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| X (mm) | 200 | 250 | 300 | B | L | Standard | Min-Max | Standard | Min-Max | Max | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Single Track | 530 | 530 | 530 | 200 | 300 | 50 | 30-75 | 150 | 120-200 | 25 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Double Track | 530 | 630 | 730 | 350 | 50 | 30-75 | 200 | 150-230 | 20 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 50 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 75 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250 | 350 | 60 | 30-75 | 180 | 120-200 | 40 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 60 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 60 | 30-75 | 280 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 280 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300 | 400 | 75 | 30-75 | 200 | 120-250 | 50 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 75 | 30-75 | 250 | 150-300 | 45 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 300 | 150-330 | 40 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Lift Gate | Adjacent | Specify Belts | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Length | Track Length | of Length | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| L (m) | X (mm) | (see Page 3-7) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | 500 | 3450 mm | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | 1000 | 4450 mm | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | 1500 | 5450 mm | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | 2000 | 6450 mm | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01651 | Guiding Pin (w Bearing) | Assembly Type | Pallet Parts | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-02056 | Positioning Pin (wout Bearing) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01654 | Retainer Standard Pin Spacing | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01653 | Retainer Close Pin Spacing | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01656 | Bumper 200 Wide Pallet | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01657 | Bumper 250 Wide Pallet | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01658 | Bumper 300 Wide Pallet | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AAA-S22-90600 | Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner | Assembly Type | Setup Tool | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Width | Pallet Width B | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| X (mm) | 200 | 250 | 300 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Double Track | 520 | 620 | 720 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Unit of | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Qty | Measure | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AAA-S06-59000 | 1 | Per Motor | Motor OnOff Control Box | Option 2 Motor Controls | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BEB-155-00001 | 1 | Per Track Motor | Capacitor 4uF 370V | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BBY-155-00004 5 6 | 1 | Per Motor | Quick Disconnect 5 Pole | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BBY-155-00007 | L | Ft Total Length | Bus Ribbon Cable 10 Motor Capacity | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BBY-155-00002 | 2 | Per Bus Ribbon | End Caps for Bus Ribbon Cable | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BBY-155-00003 | 1 | Per Bus Ribbon | Main Power Connector Bus Ribbon | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Unit of | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Qty | Measure | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AAA-S06-59000 | 1 | Per Motor | Motor OnOff Control Box | Option 1 Track Motor Controls | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BEB-155-00001 | 1 | Per Track Motor | Capacitor 4uF 370V | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Unit of | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Qty | Measure | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AAA-S06-59000 | 1 | Per Motor | Motor OnOff Control Box | Option 1 Corner Motor Controls |
| Ordering Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | F | 0 | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | T | 0 | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Table Mount | T | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | F | P | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted w AirExhaust Header | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width (B) | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length (X) | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | Header | P | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | K | - | - | F | 0 | Assembly Type | Compact Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L1 | 2000mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | E | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | End Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Nominal Module Length L | 500mm | 0 | 5 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Mount for 05M End Module | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | P | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Spur Track Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L1 | 1700mm | 1 | 7 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Manual Workstation Mount | H | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | B | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Bridge Track Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Nom End Module Length L | 1500mm | 1 | 5 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| D | L | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Double Link Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| C | I | - | 0 | 0 | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Corner Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | None | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | No Drive | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | No Drive | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | 0 |
| Ordering Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz 3 Phase | 3 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 240mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Standard Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Manual Workstation Floor Mount | H | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Mount | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | T | 0 | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Table Mount | T | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | F | P | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted w AirExhaust Header | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width (B) | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length (X) | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | Header | P | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | K | - | - | F | 0 | Assembly Type | Compact Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L1 | 2000mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | E | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | End Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Nominal Module Length L | 500mm | 0 | 5 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Mount for 05M End Module | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | P | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Spur Track Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L1 | 1700mm | 1 | 7 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Manual Workstation Mount | H | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | B | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Bridge Track Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Nom End Module Length L | 1500mm | 1 | 5 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| D | L | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Double Link Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| K | L | - | 0 | 0 | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Corner Module 90 Degree | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | None | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | No Drive | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | No Drive | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| K | U | - | 0 | 0 | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Corner Module 180 Degree | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | None | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | No Drive | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | No Drive | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | 0 |
| Ordering Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| W | T | - | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Transfer Pallets | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Length L | 250mm | 2 | 5 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 350mm | 3 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400mm | 4 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450mm | 4 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500mm | 5 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | A | H | K | - | 1 | 1 | 2 | - | 2 | Assembly Type | Conveyor Belts | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | Belt Length | mm | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ( 2 x L ) + 450 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 208VAC 60Hz 3 Phase | 3 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 240mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Standard Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Manual Workstation Floor Mount | H | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Mount | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Belts | B | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Variable Speed or Reversible Drive | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | T | 0 | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 208VAC 60Hz 3 Phase | 3 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 240mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Table Mount | T | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Mount | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Belts | B | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Variable Speed or Reversible Drive | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | G | - | 1 | 0 | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Lift Gate | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | K | - | - | F | 0 | Assembly Type | Compact Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mount | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L1 | 2000mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 208VAC 60Hz 3 Phase | 3 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 240mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| D | L | - | - | F | 0 | Assembly Type | Double Link Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 208VAC 60Hz 3 Phase | 3 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 240mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Same Direction Drives | S | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| F | T | - | 0 | 0 | 1 | N | - | 0 | 3 | 8 | 0 | Assembly Type | Legsets | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Transport Height | Belt Surface | 0 | 3 | 8 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| To Table Surface | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| F | B | - | 0 | 0 | 1 | N | - | 1 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Legsets Floor Mount Basic | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Transport Height | Belt Surface | 1 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| To Floor Surface | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| F | H | - | N | - | 1 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Legsets Floor Mounted Double | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Spur Track or Manual Workstation | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Lanes of Track Supported | 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Transport Height | Belt Surface | 1 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| To Floor Surface | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| F | C | - | - | 1 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Custom Legsets Floor Mounted Double | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Spur Track or Manual Workstation | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Legset Width | (X) mm | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Transport Height | Belt Surface | 1 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| To Floor Surface | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| D | T | - | 0 | - | 3 | 0 | Assembly Type | Drives for Track | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Number of Belts Driven | 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 208VAC 60Hz 3 Phase | 3 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Belt Speed | 240mmsecConstant | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0-300mmsec Variable Reversible | 5 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Motor Mount Orientation | 3 OClock | 3 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 6 OClock | 6 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 9 OClock | 9 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| D | C | - | 9 | 0 | 0 | 0 | - | 3 | 1 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Drives for Corner | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Turn Angle | 90 Deg | 9 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 208VAC 60Hz 3 Phase | 3 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Belt Speed | 240mmsecConstant | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| C | V | - | 0 | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Corner Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Turn Angle | 90 Deg | 0 | 9 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 180 Deg | 1 | 8 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| M | M | - | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Magazine Gating | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Travel | Forward through Gate | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Reverse Loop | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Corner Option | Gate Only | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Complete with 180 Deg Corner | K | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Loop Direction | Counterclockwise | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Clockwise | C | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| M | L | - | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Magazine Gating | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Travel | Forward through Gate | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Reverse Loop | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Corner Option | Gate Only | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Complete with 180 Deg Corner | K | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Loop Direction | Counterclockwise | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Clockwise | C | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| M | R | - | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Magazine Gating | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Travel | Forward through Gate | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Reverse Loop | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Corner Option | Gate Only | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Complete with 180 Deg Corner | K | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Loop Direction | Counterclockwise | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Clockwise | C | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| P | M | - | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Parallel Gating | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Travel | Forward through Gate | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Reverse Loop | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Loop Direction | Counterclockwise | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Clockwise | C | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| P | L | - | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Parallel Gating | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Travel | Forward through Gate | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Reverse Loop | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Loop Direction | Counterclockwise | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Clockwise | C | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| P | R | - | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Parallel Gating | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Travel | Forward through Gate | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Reverse Loop | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Loop Direction | Counterclockwise | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Clockwise | C | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| P | E | - | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Parallel Gating | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Travel | Forward through Gate | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Reverse Loop | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Loop Direction | Counterclockwise | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Clockwise | C | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| B | M | - | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Bridge Gating | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Travel | Forward through Gate | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Reverse Loop | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Loop Direction | Counterclockwise | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Clockwise | C | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| B | L | - | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Bridge Gating | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Travel | Forward through Gate | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Reverse Loop | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Loop Direction | Counterclockwise | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Clockwise | C | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| B | R | - | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Bridge Gating | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Travel | Forward through Gate | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Reverse Loop | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Loop Direction | Counterclockwise | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Clockwise | C | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| B | E | - | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Bridge Gating | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Travel | Forward through Gate | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Reverse Loop | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Loop Direction | Counterclockwise | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Clockwise | C | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| P | S | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Pallet Stop | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Stop Type | Standard | S | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Damped 1-10 | D | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Damped 3-35 | D | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Guide Rails | Short | S | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Long | L | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| None | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Number of Proxes | Standard Drive (1 Sensor) | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Variable Drive (2 Sensors) | 2 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Anti-Reversing Option | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Ratchet Pawl Included | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| P | G | - | 0 | 0 | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Pallet Guide Supplemental | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| T | M | - | 0 | 0 | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Table Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Length | 1000 mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500 mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000 mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Depth | Standard | S | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Narrow | K | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Guard Frame | With Guard Frame | G | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Guard Frame | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Air Exhaust Headers | With Headers | H | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Headers | 0 |
| HFL-2002-S Catalog Revision - April 2003 | HFL-2002-S Catalog Revision - April 2003 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Current HFL-2002 Catalog (42001) | Pending HFL-2002-S Catalog (42003) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Chapter | Subject | Completed | Format Done | Images Done | Text Done | Chapter | Subject | Images Done | Pictures Images Needed | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | System Overview | 1 | System Overview amp Specifications | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Basic principles guidance | Basic principles guidance important featuresbenefits | Iso Loop Solid Edge like current one shown | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Loop Iso w arrows Modular elements list pix pages | Loop Iso w arrows Modular elements list pix pages | Element images (mostly Meghans) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Specifications | Specifications Table amp Transport Height Voltages etc | Solid Edge Draft Side view Table Track Stands | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Using Spur amp Bridge Tracks- 4 examples | Spur Track Images w Pallets | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | System Application | Concept layouts amp text | Sample Layouts from concept files already done | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Concept layouts amp text | Steps to specify a systems (fr AG catalog w modifications) | Re-do Lanco AG images of system build-up Johns System Solid Edge | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Worldwide Location amp Address List | New Global Image - Internet | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | System Modules | 2 | Pallets | 2 | Modules amp Basic Elements | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Compact Loop Modules for Floor Mounting | Post amp Bumper Options | New Pallet Solid Edge iso w posts and bumpers Autocad plan amp side view | Pallets | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| End Modules for Floor Mounting | 3 | Linear Tracks | Post amp Bumper Options | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Single Track Modules for Floor Mounting | Single Track Modules | Linear Tracks | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Single Track Modules for Floor Mounting | Floor Mount Basic | Single Track Modules | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Double Track Modules for Floor Mounting | Floor Mount Manual Workstation | Floor Mount Basic | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Spur Track Modules w INOUT Pallet Gating System | Table Mount | Floor Mount Manual Workstation | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Bridge Track Modules w INOUT Pallet Gating System | Lift Gate Module | Lift Gate Image Solid Edge iso amp Autocad Plan View | Table Mount | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Corner Modules mod belts | Double Track Module | Lift Gate Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Stands | Double Track Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Basic Elements | Table Mount | Stands | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Tracks | Floor Mount Basic | Table Mount | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Stands | Floor Mount Double Track Spur Track Manual Workstation | Floor Mount Basic | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drives | Connection Bracket | Floor Mount Double Track Spur Track Manual Workstation | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Conveyor Belts | Drives | Connection Bracket | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Dual Belt Constant | New Solid Edge iso amp draft BW (See Dave Norman) | Drives | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | Transfer Pallets | Dual Belt Variable Reversible | Dual Belt Constant | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Coding Systems | Single Belt Constant | Dual Belt Variable Reversible | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Mounting Positions | Single Belt Constant | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | IN OUT Pallet Gating | Corner Drive | Solid Edge | Mounting Positions | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Stops | Conveyor Belts | Corner Drive | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Automatic Stop | 4 | Corners | Conveyor Belts | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Extended Stop | 90 Deg Turn | Autocad Plan Views | Corners | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Damped Stop | 180 Deg Turn | Autocad Plan Views | 90 Deg Turn | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Manual Stop | 5 | Gating System | 180 Deg Turn | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Lifting Devices | Magazine Spur Gating (Forward amp Reverse) | Johns Solid Edge iso image | Gates | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Parallel Spur Gating (Kits) | Active 1 into 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Bridges | Passive 2 into 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 6 | Station Modules | Basic Components (Add Later) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Passive Gate L amp R | 2A | Gating System | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 7 | Manual Workstation | Active Gate Adder | Magazine Spur Gating (Forward amp Reverse) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Corner Sub assemblies | Parallel Spur Gating (Kits) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 8 | Accessories | Stops Brackets Rollers (Dip amp Ball) Proxes | Bridges | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Add pneumatics | 6 | Pallet Stops amp Lifting Devices | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Automatic Stop Std amp Extended Rails | Meghans JPG | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 9 | Representatives | Damped Stop Std amp Extended Rails | Meghans JPG | 3 | Transfer Pallets amp Coding Systems | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Supplemental Guide | Meghans JPG | Pallets (Post Hole Pattern Guidelines) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | Open | Low-Cost Stop | Post amp Bumper Options | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Lifting Devices (2) | Pallet Coding (Flags and Omron) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Red = Format Done | Application Notes for Kinetic Energy (Revise)(Move to Technical Data) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Green = Text Done | 7 | Station Modules | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Blue = All Done | Station Tables Std amp Narrow w amp wo Headers | Meghan | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Guarding Options | Existing | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 8 | Manual Workstation | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Same as before | Johns new picture | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 9 | Accessories amp Controls | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Misc Accessories | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Motor Controls Options (amp Schematics) | Dave Walden | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| PLC amp PC Controls Options | Dave Walden | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Coding Options | Meghans images | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | Technical Data | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pneumatic Diagrams | Engineering | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Load Data for Pallet and Track | New Autocad side view of track section w Pallets amp Arrows for Loads | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Cycle Time vs Production Rate | Excel Spreadsheet |
HFL2002-S Module Numbering
Obsolete HFL2002-S
HFL2002
Pallet Sizes amp AFH Parts
Pallets 2-2HFL 2002-S
Proper positioning of Guide Pins is dependent on theTransfer Pallet length This will determine the nature ofthe pallet motion during a turn through a corner or gateand the pitch of multiple stopping positions LancorsquosPallet Motion Simulation software is available to assist inproper pin positioning
Minimum Positioning Pin spacing (A) is 20mm forpositioning in Standard Pallet Stops (Chapter 6) and 40mm for a Shock-Absorbing Pallet Stop
Consult Lanco for special pin positions not shown in thechart below
Ordering Information
Pallet Guiding amp Positioning Pins
Pallet Width Pallet Length A (mm)
B L Standard Min-Max Standard Min-Max Standard Min-Max Max
250 50 30-75 100 70-100 100 50-120 40300 50 30-75 150 120-200 100 50-120 25350 50 30-75 200 150-230 100 50-120 20400 50 30-75 230 150-230 120 50-150 20450 75 50-75 230 180-230 145 75-180 20500 100 50-75 230 200-230 170 75-180 20300 60 40-75 120 80-120 120 60-120 55350 60 40-75 180 120-200 110 60-150 40400 60 40-75 230 150-280 110 60-180 30450 60 40-75 280 150-280 110 60-200 30500 75 50-75 280 200-280 145 75-200 30350 75 50-75 150 100-250 125 75-150 70400 75 50-75 200 150-250 125 75-180 50450 75 50-75 250 180-300 125 75-210 45500 75 50-75 300 200-330 125 75-210 40
Z (mm)X (mm) Y (mm)
200
250
300
Part Number Description
1 AFH-A22-01651 Guiding Pin (w Bearing)
2 AFH-A22-02056 Positioning Pin (wout Bearing)
3 AFH-A22-01654 Retainer Standard Pin Spacing
4 AFH-A22-01653 Retainer Close Pin Spacing
5 AFH-A22-01656 Bumper 200 Wide Pallet
6 AFH-A22-01657 Bumper 250 Wide Pallet
7 AFH-A22-01658 Bumper 300 Wide Pallet
Item
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-1
Single Track Module
Single Track Modules are conveyor sections used totransport pallets in a linear direction They are typicallyconnected to other Single Tracks or to Corner Modules forturning pallets 90 or 180 degrees Floor mount tracks serveas the building blocks for Bridge Tracks and Spur TrackModules as well as Manual Workstations (see page 8-1)Table mount tracks are normally combined with StationModules for automatic assembly operations (see page 7-1)
Single Track Modules come complete with Mounts allConveyor Belts connection brackets and One (1) Drive
Standard system dimensions are shown here Customlengths are available on request
Standard speed 250 mms Other speeds are availableStandard voltages are 208 VAC 60 Hz and 400 VAC 50 Hz
Ordering Information
Floor Mounted
Table Mount
FloorManual Workstation Mount
L
B+10
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-2
Lift Gate Track ModuleTrack Mounted
Lift Gate Modules allow access to the inside of a transportsystem loop The Lift Gate takes the place of a standard10 meter Single Track Section between two other TrackSections The hinge hardware mounts to one track sectionand the latch hardware mounts to the other track section
Single Track Modules come complete with Hinge Latchhardware and an optional Gas Spring Assist Cylinder Thebelts on the Lift Gate are powered by the motor drive uniton the adjacent hinge side Track Module Conveyor beltlength is calculated based on the total length of the LiftGate plus the adjacent track section (hinge side) Seebelow
Standard system dimensions are shown here
Standard speed 250 mms Other speeds are availableStandard voltages are 208 VAC 60 Hz and 400 VAC 50 Hz
Ordering Information
Belt Length Calculation
When connecting a Lift Gate to the adjacent SingleTrack Module it is necessary to order two (2) additionalconveyor belts to provide drive to the Lift Gate byspanning both track sections These belts replace theadjacent track belts provided Refer to Page 3-7 toorder the required belts as specified below
L - 150
X+LX
B+10
L
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-20000 Lift Gate Unassisted 200 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20100 Lift Gate Unassisted 250 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20200 Lift Gate Unassisted 300 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20300 Lift Gate Assisted 200 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20400 Lift Gate Assisted 250 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20500 Lift Gate Assisted 300 mm Wide
Lift GateLengthL (mm)
AdjacentTrack LengthX (mm)
Specify 2 BeltsPart Number
(see page 3-7)
1000 500 AHK-112-23450
1000 1000 AHK-112-24450
1000 1500 AHK-112-25450
1000 2000 AHK-112-26450
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-3
Dimensions
Double Track ModuleFloor MountedDouble Track Modules are conveyor sections typically usedto create custom length Compact Loops or Spur TrackModules They can also be combined with Single TracksCorners (90 amp 180 Degree) and Manual Workstations formanual assembly operations (Section 8)
Double Track Modules come complete with Floor Mountsall Conveyor Belts connection brackets and Two (2) DrivesThe two drives can be configured to run in the same oropposite directions
Standard system dimensions are shown here Customlengths available on request
Standard speed 240 mms Other speeds are availableStandard voltage 208 V 60 Hz
Ordering Information
B+10
L
X 100
Module WidthX (mm)
Pallet Width B
200 250 300
Double Track 520 620 720
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-4
StandsNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately
Table MountAll Standard Table Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) when used with Table Modules shown inSection 7 Custom line heights are specified in the part number asshown below in millimeters Line Height is the distance from the floor to the top of the transfer system belt
Floor Mount BasicAll Standard Floor Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) Custom line heights are specified in thepart number as shown below in millimeters
Floor Mount Spur Tracks Double Tracks amp Manual WorkstationAll Standard Floor Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) Custom line heights are specified in thepart number as shown below in millimeters
Intermediate Element without StandIncluded with Standard Track Section Modules For attachment of any of the above Stands to transporttracks where no Intermediate Element is present Specify Part Number based on Track Section width
System WidthB (mm) Part Number Description
200 AFH-A21-01656 Intermediate Element 200
250 AFH-A21-01657 Intermediate Element 250
300 AFH-A21-01658 Intermediate Element 300
H2 H
1
885
X
1000
H2 = 140 mm
H2 = 265 mm
1000
885
Module WidthX (mm)
Pallet Width B
200 250 300
Single Track 520 520 520
Double Track 530 630 730
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-5
DrivesNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately
Standard Track Section Drive Units fall into two categories
Dual Belt w Constant SpeedFor typical track operation Standard belt speed is 250mmsecOther speeds are available
Single Belt w Constant SpeedFor situations in which a track section with a single belt isrequired whether as a dual rail track or single rail(ie Feeder Belts)
The drive unit for Standard Corner Modules is specified below It isused to drive a single belt with constant speed (418 mmsec) andcan also be used to drive Feeder Belts
Drives for Corner Modules (where additional units are needed)
Drives for Track (where additional units are needed)
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-92200 Drive Dual ndash 200 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-92300 Drive Dual ndash 250 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-92400 Drive Dual ndash 300 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93100 Drive Dual ndash 200 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-93200 Drive Dual ndash 250 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-93300 Drive Dual ndash 300 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-92500 Drive Single ndash 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93700 Drive Single ndash 400 VAC 50 Hz
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-92000 Drive Corner ndash 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93300 Drive Corner ndash 400 VAC 50 Hz
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-6
Conveyor BeltsNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately or when combining any Track Modules with Spur Tracks Bridge Tracks or Lift Gates
Ordering Information
Transport track without belt deflecting rollers
LT = 2 x L + 450 mm
Transport track with single pair of belt deflecting rollers at entry exit to Bridge Track
LT = 2 x L + 450 mmBelt lengths up to 25 mm longer can be accommodatedby adjusting a pulley in the drive unit
Transport track with two pair of belt deflecting rollers at entry exit to Spur Tracks
LT = 2 x L + 500 mm
Example
Transport Track Length = 10 m
LT = 2 x L + 450 mmLT = 2 x 1000 + 450 mmLT = 2450 mm
rArrPart No ARR-112-22450
Lanco belts are pre-made and labeled with Part Numberand Belt Length for ease of identification The belt feeddirection is also marked with an arrowStandard Belt Material is highly conductive SieglingExtremultus TT 51-6431-HC Black Polyamide fabricjacket and polyamide foil tension member Other beltmaterials are available for special applications
Combination of multiple transport tracks
It is possible to bridge over multiple transport tracks witha single conveyor belt saving drives This also occurswhen using a Lift Gate Track Module (Page 3-3)
The maximum combined transport track length is 3200 mm
How to order conveyor belts1 Calculate conveyor belt length
2 Specify Part No
L
L
L
HFL 2002-S Corners 4-1
Corner Modules are are typically connected to any Single orDouble Track Module and used to change the pallet directionby 90 or 180 degrees They can be used to form CompactLoops combined with Gate Modules (Chapter 5) to createcustom Spur Tracks or configured with Linear Tracks tomake serpentine or any shape systems
Corner Modules mount to each of the adjacent modules andinclude a belt drive unit angled at 45 degrees to quickly andefficiently transfer a pallet through the turn
Standard speed 418 mmsStandard voltage 208 V 60 Hz
Ordering Information
Corner Module
90ordm Corner Module 180ordm Corner Module
IO Requirements90 Deg Corner 1 Motor180 Deg Corner 2 Motors
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-1
Gating Systems
Gating Systems are an important part of the HFL 2002-STransfer System They allow pallets to be diverted from themain transport loop onto Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
This Section offers the Gating System mechanisms that areused to divert pallets into Spurs or Bridge Tracks Commonexamples of Gating Systems are shown To better clarifyhow these Gates are used it is important to understand thedefinition of Spur Tracks and Bridge Tracks
There are two types of Spur Tracks Magazines with workarea perpendicular to the main loop and Parallel Trackswith work area parallel to the main loop Both can be usedfor manual or automatic workstations By swapping In amp OutGates of a Spur Track a batch-processing cell can becreated that allows cyclic repetitions at the stations Thisalso reverses pallet orientation for access from the oppositeside Note that Spur Tracks can be placed directly on thecorners of a transport loop which helps save floor space
There are two types of Bridge Tracks In-Line Tracksused to bypass operations on a transport loop and Off-LineTracks used to create custom Spur Tracks
Gating Systems mount to Linear Track Modules (Section 3)and include switching gates pallet stops queue sensorsand Corner Modules (for parallel tracks) Pallet Coding(Section 9) is typically required to identify pallets inconjunction with Gating Systems
Overview
Magazine Spur (Middle)With Manual Workstation
Parallel Spur (Right)Reverse Loop
In-Line Bridge Track
Table Module
Corner Module
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-2
Magazine Gating
Magazine Middle Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between its Linear Tracks to the mainloop (ie there is no separation between the In amp Out Gates alongthe main loop track) A 180deg Corner Module (Section 4) fitsperfectly on the opposite end of the Magazine Magazines aretypically used for manual workstations (See page 1-3) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2) queuesensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
Magazine Middle Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Middle GateGate-Only
Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-3
Magazine Gating
Magazine Left Gates connect Magazines that have the minimumdistance possible between their Linear Tracks directly to thecorners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of theMagazine By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine thepallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite sideaccess andor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Left Gates include(1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine Left Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel DirectionPallet Travel
Direction
Magazine Left Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-4
Magazine Right Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between their Linear Tracks directly tothe corners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of whateverlength Double Track Module is used for the Spur By swappingthe In amp Out Gates on the Spur the pallet orientation can berotated (reverse loop) for opposite side access andor to performcyclic repetitions on the Spur stationsMagazine Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine GatingMagazine Right Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Right Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-5
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Middle Gates link Parallel Tracks to the transport loop atthe minimum distance allowed between the Parallel and transportloop tracks (ie there is no separation between the In-Gate andthe Corner to the Linear Track) Parallel tracks can be any length(See page 1-3 for various ways to use Parallel Tracks) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Parallel Track the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsParallel Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel Middle Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Middle Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-6
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Left Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the left cornerof the transport loop (to save space) at the minimum distanceallowed between the Parallel and transport loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesNOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module is included withreversing loopFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Left Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Left Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-7
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Right Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the rightcorner of the transport loop (to save space) at the minimumdistance allowed between the Parallel and loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestationsParallel Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3)queue sensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree CornerModules NOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module isincluded with reversing loop
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Right Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Right Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-8
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel End Gates link Parallel Tracks to the end of the transportloop (to save space) at the minimum distance allowed between theParallel and transport loop tracks Non-reversing Parallel Tracksare as wide as the transport loop (See page 1-3 for various waysto use Parallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on theParallel Track the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop)for opposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel End Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queue sensorsfor traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner Modules TheReverse Loop version includes (2) additional Corner Modules
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel End Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-9
Bridge Tracks can be In-Line (for bypassing operations on a loop)and Off-Line (for building custom Spur Tracks) In-Line BridgeGates connect Bridge Tracks to opposite sides of a transport loopBy swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Bridge Tracks the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsBridge Tracks Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic controlFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gates link custom-sized Spurs anywherealong a Linear Track Module and include (1) pneumaticallyoperated switching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) palletstops and (3) queue sensors for traffic control Custom Spurshave variable separation between the In amp Out Gates therefore anadditional Pallet Stop is included for staging pallet(s) betweenthem This minimizes pallet transfer time through the Bridge
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Modules (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Bridge Track GatingIn-Line Bridge Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
In-Line Bridge Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleForward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-10
Off-Line Bridge Right Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the rightcorner of a transport loop An additional Pallet Stop is included forstaging pallet(s) between the In amp Out Gates This minimizespallet transfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp OutGates on a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverseloop) for access or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Off-Line Bridge Left Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the leftcorner of a transport loop Custom Spurs have variable separationbetween the In amp Out Gates therefore an additional Pallet Stop isincluded for staging pallet(s) between them This minimizes pallettransfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp Out Gateson a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foraccess or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specify
bull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Bridge Track GatingOff-Line Bridge Left Gate
Off-Line Bridge Right Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate Left Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate LeftReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate Right Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate RightReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-1
Track Mounted Pallet Stops
Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
The Track Mounted Pallet Stop mounts directly to the trackprofile and includes an actuated pawl lever that preciselystops the Pallet guide pins Rails secure the pallet position inthe lateral direction An inductive sensor embedded in the railsupport verifies that the pallet pin is in position This allowsstopping on multiple pallet pins or indexing through a stationAn anti-reversing latching pawl can be added to preventupstream-applied loads from moving the pallet backwards inthe stop (see Accessories)
Pallet Stops with Long Guide Rails are used in applicationswhere the spacing between any two pallet posts is 150 mm orless Pallet Stops with Short Guide Rails are used primarilyfor pallet traffic control at gates or anywhere queuing ofpallets needs to be controlled Stops with Short Guide Railsmay also be used to position longer pallets in an automaticstation when the spacing between any two posts is greaterthan 150 mm together with a Supplemental Guide
HD Pallet Stops have a larger release cylinder and arespecified when there is a high back pressure load on the stopBack pressure is a function of pallet weight number of palletsin queue and conveyor belt speed Choose an HD PalletStop when the back pressure load exceeds 180 N
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering InformationIO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HD Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
HD Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Supplemental Guide
AAA-S22-41800 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-41900 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42000 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-42100 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-42200 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42300 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43200 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43300 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43400 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43500 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43600 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43700 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AFH-A22-00623 Supplemental Guide 200 wide
AFH-A22-00633 Supplemental Guide 250 wide
AFH-A22-00643 Supplemental Guide 300 wide
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
| Pallet Length | Pallet Width B | Pallet Width | Pallet Length | X (mm) | Y (mm) | Z (mm) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| L | 200 | 250 | 300 | B | L | Standard | Min-Max | Standard | Min-Max | Max | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250 | 200 | 250 | 50 | 30-75 | 100 | 70-120 | 25 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300 | 300 | 50 | 30-75 | 150 | 120-200 | 25 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 350 | 350 | 50 | 30-75 | 200 | 150-230 | 20 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 400 | 50 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 450 | 75 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250 | 300 | 60 | 30-75 | 120 | 80-160 | 55 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 350 | 60 | 30-75 | 180 | 120-200 | 40 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 60 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 60 | 30-75 | 280 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 280 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300 | 350 | 75 | 30-75 | 200 | 120-250 | 50 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 75 | 30-75 | 200 | 120-250 | 50 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 75 | 30-75 | 250 | 150-300 | 45 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 300 | 150-330 | 40 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| A | H | K | - | 1 | 1 | 2 | - | 2 | Assembly Type | Conveyor Belts | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Belt Length | mm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ( 2 x L ) + 450 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| B (mm) | Part Number | Description | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 200 | AFH-A21-01656 | Intermediate Element 200 | Assembly Type | Intermediate Element | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250 | AFH-A21-01657 | Intermediate Element 250 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300 | AFH-A21-01658 | Intermediate Element 300 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Stand Width | Pallet Width B | Pallet Width | Pallet Length | X (mm) | Y (mm) | Z (mm) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| X (mm) | 200 | 250 | 300 | B | L | Standard | Min-Max | Standard | Min-Max | Max | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Single Track | 530 | 530 | 530 | 200 | 300 | 50 | 30-75 | 150 | 120-200 | 25 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Double Track | 530 | 630 | 730 | 350 | 50 | 30-75 | 200 | 150-230 | 20 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 50 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 75 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250 | 350 | 60 | 30-75 | 180 | 120-200 | 40 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 60 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 60 | 30-75 | 280 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 280 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300 | 400 | 75 | 30-75 | 200 | 120-250 | 50 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 75 | 30-75 | 250 | 150-300 | 45 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 300 | 150-330 | 40 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Lift Gate | Adjacent | Specify Belts | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Length | Track Length | of Length | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| L (m) | X (mm) | (see Page 3-7) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | 500 | 3450 mm | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | 1000 | 4450 mm | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | 1500 | 5450 mm | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | 2000 | 6450 mm | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01651 | Guiding Pin (w Bearing) | Assembly Type | Pallet Parts | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-02056 | Positioning Pin (wout Bearing) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01654 | Retainer Standard Pin Spacing | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01653 | Retainer Close Pin Spacing | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01656 | Bumper 200 Wide Pallet | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01657 | Bumper 250 Wide Pallet | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01658 | Bumper 300 Wide Pallet | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AAA-S22-90600 | Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner | Assembly Type | Setup Tool | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Width | Pallet Width B | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| X (mm) | 200 | 250 | 300 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Double Track | 520 | 620 | 720 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Unit of | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Qty | Measure | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AAA-S06-59000 | 1 | Per Motor | Motor OnOff Control Box | Option 2 Motor Controls | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BEB-155-00001 | 1 | Per Track Motor | Capacitor 4uF 370V | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BBY-155-00004 5 6 | 1 | Per Motor | Quick Disconnect 5 Pole | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BBY-155-00007 | L | Ft Total Length | Bus Ribbon Cable 10 Motor Capacity | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BBY-155-00002 | 2 | Per Bus Ribbon | End Caps for Bus Ribbon Cable | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BBY-155-00003 | 1 | Per Bus Ribbon | Main Power Connector Bus Ribbon | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Unit of | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Qty | Measure | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AAA-S06-59000 | 1 | Per Motor | Motor OnOff Control Box | Option 1 Track Motor Controls | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BEB-155-00001 | 1 | Per Track Motor | Capacitor 4uF 370V | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Unit of | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Qty | Measure | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AAA-S06-59000 | 1 | Per Motor | Motor OnOff Control Box | Option 1 Corner Motor Controls |
| Ordering Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | F | 0 | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | T | 0 | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Table Mount | T | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | F | P | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted w AirExhaust Header | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width (B) | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length (X) | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | Header | P | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | K | - | - | F | 0 | Assembly Type | Compact Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L1 | 2000mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | E | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | End Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Nominal Module Length L | 500mm | 0 | 5 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Mount for 05M End Module | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | P | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Spur Track Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L1 | 1700mm | 1 | 7 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Manual Workstation Mount | H | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | B | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Bridge Track Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Nom End Module Length L | 1500mm | 1 | 5 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| D | L | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Double Link Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| C | I | - | 0 | 0 | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Corner Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | None | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | No Drive | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | No Drive | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | 0 |
| Ordering Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz 3 Phase | 3 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 240mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Standard Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Manual Workstation Floor Mount | H | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Mount | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | T | 0 | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Table Mount | T | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | F | P | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted w AirExhaust Header | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width (B) | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length (X) | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | Header | P | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | K | - | - | F | 0 | Assembly Type | Compact Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L1 | 2000mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | E | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | End Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Nominal Module Length L | 500mm | 0 | 5 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Mount for 05M End Module | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | P | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Spur Track Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L1 | 1700mm | 1 | 7 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Manual Workstation Mount | H | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | B | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Bridge Track Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Nom End Module Length L | 1500mm | 1 | 5 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| D | L | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Double Link Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| K | L | - | 0 | 0 | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Corner Module 90 Degree | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | None | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | No Drive | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | No Drive | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| K | U | - | 0 | 0 | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Corner Module 180 Degree | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | None | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | No Drive | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | No Drive | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | 0 |
| Ordering Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| W | T | - | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Transfer Pallets | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Length L | 250mm | 2 | 5 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 350mm | 3 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400mm | 4 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450mm | 4 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500mm | 5 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | A | H | K | - | 1 | 1 | 2 | - | 2 | Assembly Type | Conveyor Belts | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | Belt Length | mm | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ( 2 x L ) + 450 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 208VAC 60Hz 3 Phase | 3 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 240mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Standard Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Manual Workstation Floor Mount | H | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Mount | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Belts | B | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Variable Speed or Reversible Drive | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | T | 0 | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 208VAC 60Hz 3 Phase | 3 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 240mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Table Mount | T | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Mount | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Belts | B | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Variable Speed or Reversible Drive | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | G | - | 1 | 0 | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Lift Gate | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | K | - | - | F | 0 | Assembly Type | Compact Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mount | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L1 | 2000mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 208VAC 60Hz 3 Phase | 3 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 240mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| D | L | - | - | F | 0 | Assembly Type | Double Link Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 208VAC 60Hz 3 Phase | 3 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 240mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Same Direction Drives | S | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| F | T | - | 0 | 0 | 1 | N | - | 0 | 3 | 8 | 0 | Assembly Type | Legsets | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Transport Height | Belt Surface | 0 | 3 | 8 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| To Table Surface | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| F | B | - | 0 | 0 | 1 | N | - | 1 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Legsets Floor Mount Basic | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Transport Height | Belt Surface | 1 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| To Floor Surface | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| F | H | - | N | - | 1 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Legsets Floor Mounted Double | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Spur Track or Manual Workstation | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Lanes of Track Supported | 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Transport Height | Belt Surface | 1 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| To Floor Surface | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| F | C | - | - | 1 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Custom Legsets Floor Mounted Double | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Spur Track or Manual Workstation | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Legset Width | (X) mm | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Transport Height | Belt Surface | 1 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| To Floor Surface | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| D | T | - | 0 | - | 3 | 0 | Assembly Type | Drives for Track | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Number of Belts Driven | 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 208VAC 60Hz 3 Phase | 3 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Belt Speed | 240mmsecConstant | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0-300mmsec Variable Reversible | 5 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Motor Mount Orientation | 3 OClock | 3 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 6 OClock | 6 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 9 OClock | 9 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| D | C | - | 9 | 0 | 0 | 0 | - | 3 | 1 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Drives for Corner | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Turn Angle | 90 Deg | 9 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 208VAC 60Hz 3 Phase | 3 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Belt Speed | 240mmsecConstant | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| C | V | - | 0 | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Corner Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Turn Angle | 90 Deg | 0 | 9 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 180 Deg | 1 | 8 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| M | M | - | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Magazine Gating | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Travel | Forward through Gate | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Reverse Loop | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Corner Option | Gate Only | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Complete with 180 Deg Corner | K | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Loop Direction | Counterclockwise | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Clockwise | C | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| M | L | - | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Magazine Gating | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Travel | Forward through Gate | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Reverse Loop | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Corner Option | Gate Only | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Complete with 180 Deg Corner | K | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Loop Direction | Counterclockwise | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Clockwise | C | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| M | R | - | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Magazine Gating | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Travel | Forward through Gate | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Reverse Loop | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Corner Option | Gate Only | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Complete with 180 Deg Corner | K | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Loop Direction | Counterclockwise | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Clockwise | C | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| P | M | - | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Parallel Gating | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Travel | Forward through Gate | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Reverse Loop | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Loop Direction | Counterclockwise | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Clockwise | C | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| P | L | - | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Parallel Gating | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Travel | Forward through Gate | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Reverse Loop | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Loop Direction | Counterclockwise | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Clockwise | C | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| P | R | - | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Parallel Gating | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Travel | Forward through Gate | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Reverse Loop | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Loop Direction | Counterclockwise | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Clockwise | C | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| P | E | - | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Parallel Gating | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Travel | Forward through Gate | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Reverse Loop | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Loop Direction | Counterclockwise | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Clockwise | C | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| B | M | - | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Bridge Gating | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Travel | Forward through Gate | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Reverse Loop | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Loop Direction | Counterclockwise | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Clockwise | C | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| B | L | - | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Bridge Gating | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Travel | Forward through Gate | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Reverse Loop | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Loop Direction | Counterclockwise | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Clockwise | C | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| B | R | - | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Bridge Gating | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Travel | Forward through Gate | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Reverse Loop | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Loop Direction | Counterclockwise | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Clockwise | C | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| B | E | - | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Bridge Gating | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Pallet Travel | Forward through Gate | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Reverse Loop | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Loop Direction | Counterclockwise | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Clockwise | C | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| P | S | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Pallet Stop | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Stop Type | Standard | S | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Damped 1-10 | D | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Damped 3-35 | D | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Guide Rails | Short | S | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Long | L | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| None | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Number of Proxes | Standard Drive (1 Sensor) | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Variable Drive (2 Sensors) | 2 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Anti-Reversing Option | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Ratchet Pawl Included | R | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| P | G | - | 0 | 0 | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Pallet Guide Supplemental | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| T | M | - | 0 | 0 | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Table Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Length | 1000 mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500 mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000 mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Depth | Standard | S | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Narrow | K | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Guard Frame | With Guard Frame | G | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Guard Frame | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Air Exhaust Headers | With Headers | H | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Headers | 0 |
Obsolete HFL2002-S
HFL2002
Pallet Sizes amp AFH Parts
Pallets 2-2HFL 2002-S
Proper positioning of Guide Pins is dependent on theTransfer Pallet length This will determine the nature ofthe pallet motion during a turn through a corner or gateand the pitch of multiple stopping positions LancorsquosPallet Motion Simulation software is available to assist inproper pin positioning
Minimum Positioning Pin spacing (A) is 20mm forpositioning in Standard Pallet Stops (Chapter 6) and 40mm for a Shock-Absorbing Pallet Stop
Consult Lanco for special pin positions not shown in thechart below
Ordering Information
Pallet Guiding amp Positioning Pins
Pallet Width Pallet Length A (mm)
B L Standard Min-Max Standard Min-Max Standard Min-Max Max
250 50 30-75 100 70-100 100 50-120 40300 50 30-75 150 120-200 100 50-120 25350 50 30-75 200 150-230 100 50-120 20400 50 30-75 230 150-230 120 50-150 20450 75 50-75 230 180-230 145 75-180 20500 100 50-75 230 200-230 170 75-180 20300 60 40-75 120 80-120 120 60-120 55350 60 40-75 180 120-200 110 60-150 40400 60 40-75 230 150-280 110 60-180 30450 60 40-75 280 150-280 110 60-200 30500 75 50-75 280 200-280 145 75-200 30350 75 50-75 150 100-250 125 75-150 70400 75 50-75 200 150-250 125 75-180 50450 75 50-75 250 180-300 125 75-210 45500 75 50-75 300 200-330 125 75-210 40
Z (mm)X (mm) Y (mm)
200
250
300
Part Number Description
1 AFH-A22-01651 Guiding Pin (w Bearing)
2 AFH-A22-02056 Positioning Pin (wout Bearing)
3 AFH-A22-01654 Retainer Standard Pin Spacing
4 AFH-A22-01653 Retainer Close Pin Spacing
5 AFH-A22-01656 Bumper 200 Wide Pallet
6 AFH-A22-01657 Bumper 250 Wide Pallet
7 AFH-A22-01658 Bumper 300 Wide Pallet
Item
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-1
Single Track Module
Single Track Modules are conveyor sections used totransport pallets in a linear direction They are typicallyconnected to other Single Tracks or to Corner Modules forturning pallets 90 or 180 degrees Floor mount tracks serveas the building blocks for Bridge Tracks and Spur TrackModules as well as Manual Workstations (see page 8-1)Table mount tracks are normally combined with StationModules for automatic assembly operations (see page 7-1)
Single Track Modules come complete with Mounts allConveyor Belts connection brackets and One (1) Drive
Standard system dimensions are shown here Customlengths are available on request
Standard speed 250 mms Other speeds are availableStandard voltages are 208 VAC 60 Hz and 400 VAC 50 Hz
Ordering Information
Floor Mounted
Table Mount
FloorManual Workstation Mount
L
B+10
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-2
Lift Gate Track ModuleTrack Mounted
Lift Gate Modules allow access to the inside of a transportsystem loop The Lift Gate takes the place of a standard10 meter Single Track Section between two other TrackSections The hinge hardware mounts to one track sectionand the latch hardware mounts to the other track section
Single Track Modules come complete with Hinge Latchhardware and an optional Gas Spring Assist Cylinder Thebelts on the Lift Gate are powered by the motor drive uniton the adjacent hinge side Track Module Conveyor beltlength is calculated based on the total length of the LiftGate plus the adjacent track section (hinge side) Seebelow
Standard system dimensions are shown here
Standard speed 250 mms Other speeds are availableStandard voltages are 208 VAC 60 Hz and 400 VAC 50 Hz
Ordering Information
Belt Length Calculation
When connecting a Lift Gate to the adjacent SingleTrack Module it is necessary to order two (2) additionalconveyor belts to provide drive to the Lift Gate byspanning both track sections These belts replace theadjacent track belts provided Refer to Page 3-7 toorder the required belts as specified below
L - 150
X+LX
B+10
L
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-20000 Lift Gate Unassisted 200 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20100 Lift Gate Unassisted 250 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20200 Lift Gate Unassisted 300 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20300 Lift Gate Assisted 200 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20400 Lift Gate Assisted 250 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20500 Lift Gate Assisted 300 mm Wide
Lift GateLengthL (mm)
AdjacentTrack LengthX (mm)
Specify 2 BeltsPart Number
(see page 3-7)
1000 500 AHK-112-23450
1000 1000 AHK-112-24450
1000 1500 AHK-112-25450
1000 2000 AHK-112-26450
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-3
Dimensions
Double Track ModuleFloor MountedDouble Track Modules are conveyor sections typically usedto create custom length Compact Loops or Spur TrackModules They can also be combined with Single TracksCorners (90 amp 180 Degree) and Manual Workstations formanual assembly operations (Section 8)
Double Track Modules come complete with Floor Mountsall Conveyor Belts connection brackets and Two (2) DrivesThe two drives can be configured to run in the same oropposite directions
Standard system dimensions are shown here Customlengths available on request
Standard speed 240 mms Other speeds are availableStandard voltage 208 V 60 Hz
Ordering Information
B+10
L
X 100
Module WidthX (mm)
Pallet Width B
200 250 300
Double Track 520 620 720
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-4
StandsNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately
Table MountAll Standard Table Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) when used with Table Modules shown inSection 7 Custom line heights are specified in the part number asshown below in millimeters Line Height is the distance from the floor to the top of the transfer system belt
Floor Mount BasicAll Standard Floor Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) Custom line heights are specified in thepart number as shown below in millimeters
Floor Mount Spur Tracks Double Tracks amp Manual WorkstationAll Standard Floor Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) Custom line heights are specified in thepart number as shown below in millimeters
Intermediate Element without StandIncluded with Standard Track Section Modules For attachment of any of the above Stands to transporttracks where no Intermediate Element is present Specify Part Number based on Track Section width
System WidthB (mm) Part Number Description
200 AFH-A21-01656 Intermediate Element 200
250 AFH-A21-01657 Intermediate Element 250
300 AFH-A21-01658 Intermediate Element 300
H2 H
1
885
X
1000
H2 = 140 mm
H2 = 265 mm
1000
885
Module WidthX (mm)
Pallet Width B
200 250 300
Single Track 520 520 520
Double Track 530 630 730
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-5
DrivesNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately
Standard Track Section Drive Units fall into two categories
Dual Belt w Constant SpeedFor typical track operation Standard belt speed is 250mmsecOther speeds are available
Single Belt w Constant SpeedFor situations in which a track section with a single belt isrequired whether as a dual rail track or single rail(ie Feeder Belts)
The drive unit for Standard Corner Modules is specified below It isused to drive a single belt with constant speed (418 mmsec) andcan also be used to drive Feeder Belts
Drives for Corner Modules (where additional units are needed)
Drives for Track (where additional units are needed)
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-92200 Drive Dual ndash 200 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-92300 Drive Dual ndash 250 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-92400 Drive Dual ndash 300 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93100 Drive Dual ndash 200 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-93200 Drive Dual ndash 250 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-93300 Drive Dual ndash 300 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-92500 Drive Single ndash 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93700 Drive Single ndash 400 VAC 50 Hz
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-92000 Drive Corner ndash 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93300 Drive Corner ndash 400 VAC 50 Hz
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-6
Conveyor BeltsNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately or when combining any Track Modules with Spur Tracks Bridge Tracks or Lift Gates
Ordering Information
Transport track without belt deflecting rollers
LT = 2 x L + 450 mm
Transport track with single pair of belt deflecting rollers at entry exit to Bridge Track
LT = 2 x L + 450 mmBelt lengths up to 25 mm longer can be accommodatedby adjusting a pulley in the drive unit
Transport track with two pair of belt deflecting rollers at entry exit to Spur Tracks
LT = 2 x L + 500 mm
Example
Transport Track Length = 10 m
LT = 2 x L + 450 mmLT = 2 x 1000 + 450 mmLT = 2450 mm
rArrPart No ARR-112-22450
Lanco belts are pre-made and labeled with Part Numberand Belt Length for ease of identification The belt feeddirection is also marked with an arrowStandard Belt Material is highly conductive SieglingExtremultus TT 51-6431-HC Black Polyamide fabricjacket and polyamide foil tension member Other beltmaterials are available for special applications
Combination of multiple transport tracks
It is possible to bridge over multiple transport tracks witha single conveyor belt saving drives This also occurswhen using a Lift Gate Track Module (Page 3-3)
The maximum combined transport track length is 3200 mm
How to order conveyor belts1 Calculate conveyor belt length
2 Specify Part No
L
L
L
HFL 2002-S Corners 4-1
Corner Modules are are typically connected to any Single orDouble Track Module and used to change the pallet directionby 90 or 180 degrees They can be used to form CompactLoops combined with Gate Modules (Chapter 5) to createcustom Spur Tracks or configured with Linear Tracks tomake serpentine or any shape systems
Corner Modules mount to each of the adjacent modules andinclude a belt drive unit angled at 45 degrees to quickly andefficiently transfer a pallet through the turn
Standard speed 418 mmsStandard voltage 208 V 60 Hz
Ordering Information
Corner Module
90ordm Corner Module 180ordm Corner Module
IO Requirements90 Deg Corner 1 Motor180 Deg Corner 2 Motors
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-1
Gating Systems
Gating Systems are an important part of the HFL 2002-STransfer System They allow pallets to be diverted from themain transport loop onto Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
This Section offers the Gating System mechanisms that areused to divert pallets into Spurs or Bridge Tracks Commonexamples of Gating Systems are shown To better clarifyhow these Gates are used it is important to understand thedefinition of Spur Tracks and Bridge Tracks
There are two types of Spur Tracks Magazines with workarea perpendicular to the main loop and Parallel Trackswith work area parallel to the main loop Both can be usedfor manual or automatic workstations By swapping In amp OutGates of a Spur Track a batch-processing cell can becreated that allows cyclic repetitions at the stations Thisalso reverses pallet orientation for access from the oppositeside Note that Spur Tracks can be placed directly on thecorners of a transport loop which helps save floor space
There are two types of Bridge Tracks In-Line Tracksused to bypass operations on a transport loop and Off-LineTracks used to create custom Spur Tracks
Gating Systems mount to Linear Track Modules (Section 3)and include switching gates pallet stops queue sensorsand Corner Modules (for parallel tracks) Pallet Coding(Section 9) is typically required to identify pallets inconjunction with Gating Systems
Overview
Magazine Spur (Middle)With Manual Workstation
Parallel Spur (Right)Reverse Loop
In-Line Bridge Track
Table Module
Corner Module
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-2
Magazine Gating
Magazine Middle Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between its Linear Tracks to the mainloop (ie there is no separation between the In amp Out Gates alongthe main loop track) A 180deg Corner Module (Section 4) fitsperfectly on the opposite end of the Magazine Magazines aretypically used for manual workstations (See page 1-3) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2) queuesensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
Magazine Middle Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Middle GateGate-Only
Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-3
Magazine Gating
Magazine Left Gates connect Magazines that have the minimumdistance possible between their Linear Tracks directly to thecorners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of theMagazine By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine thepallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite sideaccess andor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Left Gates include(1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine Left Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel DirectionPallet Travel
Direction
Magazine Left Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-4
Magazine Right Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between their Linear Tracks directly tothe corners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of whateverlength Double Track Module is used for the Spur By swappingthe In amp Out Gates on the Spur the pallet orientation can berotated (reverse loop) for opposite side access andor to performcyclic repetitions on the Spur stationsMagazine Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine GatingMagazine Right Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Right Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-5
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Middle Gates link Parallel Tracks to the transport loop atthe minimum distance allowed between the Parallel and transportloop tracks (ie there is no separation between the In-Gate andthe Corner to the Linear Track) Parallel tracks can be any length(See page 1-3 for various ways to use Parallel Tracks) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Parallel Track the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsParallel Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel Middle Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Middle Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-6
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Left Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the left cornerof the transport loop (to save space) at the minimum distanceallowed between the Parallel and transport loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesNOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module is included withreversing loopFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Left Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Left Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-7
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Right Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the rightcorner of the transport loop (to save space) at the minimumdistance allowed between the Parallel and loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestationsParallel Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3)queue sensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree CornerModules NOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module isincluded with reversing loop
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Right Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Right Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-8
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel End Gates link Parallel Tracks to the end of the transportloop (to save space) at the minimum distance allowed between theParallel and transport loop tracks Non-reversing Parallel Tracksare as wide as the transport loop (See page 1-3 for various waysto use Parallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on theParallel Track the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop)for opposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel End Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queue sensorsfor traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner Modules TheReverse Loop version includes (2) additional Corner Modules
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel End Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-9
Bridge Tracks can be In-Line (for bypassing operations on a loop)and Off-Line (for building custom Spur Tracks) In-Line BridgeGates connect Bridge Tracks to opposite sides of a transport loopBy swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Bridge Tracks the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsBridge Tracks Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic controlFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gates link custom-sized Spurs anywherealong a Linear Track Module and include (1) pneumaticallyoperated switching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) palletstops and (3) queue sensors for traffic control Custom Spurshave variable separation between the In amp Out Gates therefore anadditional Pallet Stop is included for staging pallet(s) betweenthem This minimizes pallet transfer time through the Bridge
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Modules (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Bridge Track GatingIn-Line Bridge Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
In-Line Bridge Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleForward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-10
Off-Line Bridge Right Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the rightcorner of a transport loop An additional Pallet Stop is included forstaging pallet(s) between the In amp Out Gates This minimizespallet transfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp OutGates on a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverseloop) for access or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Off-Line Bridge Left Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the leftcorner of a transport loop Custom Spurs have variable separationbetween the In amp Out Gates therefore an additional Pallet Stop isincluded for staging pallet(s) between them This minimizes pallettransfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp Out Gateson a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foraccess or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specify
bull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Bridge Track GatingOff-Line Bridge Left Gate
Off-Line Bridge Right Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate Left Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate LeftReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate Right Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate RightReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-1
Track Mounted Pallet Stops
Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
The Track Mounted Pallet Stop mounts directly to the trackprofile and includes an actuated pawl lever that preciselystops the Pallet guide pins Rails secure the pallet position inthe lateral direction An inductive sensor embedded in the railsupport verifies that the pallet pin is in position This allowsstopping on multiple pallet pins or indexing through a stationAn anti-reversing latching pawl can be added to preventupstream-applied loads from moving the pallet backwards inthe stop (see Accessories)
Pallet Stops with Long Guide Rails are used in applicationswhere the spacing between any two pallet posts is 150 mm orless Pallet Stops with Short Guide Rails are used primarilyfor pallet traffic control at gates or anywhere queuing ofpallets needs to be controlled Stops with Short Guide Railsmay also be used to position longer pallets in an automaticstation when the spacing between any two posts is greaterthan 150 mm together with a Supplemental Guide
HD Pallet Stops have a larger release cylinder and arespecified when there is a high back pressure load on the stopBack pressure is a function of pallet weight number of palletsin queue and conveyor belt speed Choose an HD PalletStop when the back pressure load exceeds 180 N
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering InformationIO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HD Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
HD Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Supplemental Guide
AAA-S22-41800 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-41900 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42000 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-42100 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-42200 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42300 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43200 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43300 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43400 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43500 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43600 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43700 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AFH-A22-00623 Supplemental Guide 200 wide
AFH-A22-00633 Supplemental Guide 250 wide
AFH-A22-00643 Supplemental Guide 300 wide
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
| Pallet Length | Pallet Width B | Pallet Width | Pallet Length | X (mm) | Y (mm) | Z (mm) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| L | 200 | 250 | 300 | B | L | Standard | Min-Max | Standard | Min-Max | Max | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250 | 200 | 250 | 50 | 30-75 | 100 | 70-120 | 25 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300 | 300 | 50 | 30-75 | 150 | 120-200 | 25 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 350 | 350 | 50 | 30-75 | 200 | 150-230 | 20 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 400 | 50 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 450 | 75 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250 | 300 | 60 | 30-75 | 120 | 80-160 | 55 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 350 | 60 | 30-75 | 180 | 120-200 | 40 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 60 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 60 | 30-75 | 280 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 280 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300 | 350 | 75 | 30-75 | 200 | 120-250 | 50 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 75 | 30-75 | 200 | 120-250 | 50 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 75 | 30-75 | 250 | 150-300 | 45 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 300 | 150-330 | 40 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| A | H | K | - | 1 | 1 | 2 | - | 2 | Assembly Type | Conveyor Belts | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Belt Length | mm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ( 2 x L ) + 450 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| B (mm) | Part Number | Description | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 200 | AFH-A21-01656 | Intermediate Element 200 | Assembly Type | Intermediate Element | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250 | AFH-A21-01657 | Intermediate Element 250 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300 | AFH-A21-01658 | Intermediate Element 300 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Stand Width | Pallet Width B | Pallet Width | Pallet Length | X (mm) | Y (mm) | Z (mm) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| X (mm) | 200 | 250 | 300 | B | L | Standard | Min-Max | Standard | Min-Max | Max | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Single Track | 530 | 530 | 530 | 200 | 300 | 50 | 30-75 | 150 | 120-200 | 25 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Double Track | 530 | 630 | 730 | 350 | 50 | 30-75 | 200 | 150-230 | 20 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 50 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 75 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250 | 350 | 60 | 30-75 | 180 | 120-200 | 40 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 60 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 60 | 30-75 | 280 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 280 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300 | 400 | 75 | 30-75 | 200 | 120-250 | 50 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 75 | 30-75 | 250 | 150-300 | 45 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 300 | 150-330 | 40 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Lift Gate | Adjacent | Specify Belts | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Length | Track Length | of Length | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| L (m) | X (mm) | (see Page 3-7) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | 500 | 3450 mm | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | 1000 | 4450 mm | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | 1500 | 5450 mm | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | 2000 | 6450 mm | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01651 | Guiding Pin (w Bearing) | Assembly Type | Pallet Parts | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-02056 | Positioning Pin (wout Bearing) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01654 | Retainer Standard Pin Spacing | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01653 | Retainer Close Pin Spacing | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01656 | Bumper 200 Wide Pallet | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01657 | Bumper 250 Wide Pallet | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01658 | Bumper 300 Wide Pallet | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AAA-S22-90600 | Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner | Assembly Type | Setup Tool | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Width | Pallet Width B | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| X (mm) | 200 | 250 | 300 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Double Track | 520 | 620 | 720 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Unit of | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Qty | Measure | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AAA-S06-59000 | 1 | Per Motor | Motor OnOff Control Box | Option 2 Motor Controls | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BEB-155-00001 | 1 | Per Track Motor | Capacitor 4uF 370V | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BBY-155-00004 5 6 | 1 | Per Motor | Quick Disconnect 5 Pole | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BBY-155-00007 | L | Ft Total Length | Bus Ribbon Cable 10 Motor Capacity | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BBY-155-00002 | 2 | Per Bus Ribbon | End Caps for Bus Ribbon Cable | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BBY-155-00003 | 1 | Per Bus Ribbon | Main Power Connector Bus Ribbon | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Unit of | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Qty | Measure | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AAA-S06-59000 | 1 | Per Motor | Motor OnOff Control Box | Option 1 Track Motor Controls | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BEB-155-00001 | 1 | Per Track Motor | Capacitor 4uF 370V | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Unit of | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Qty | Measure | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AAA-S06-59000 | 1 | Per Motor | Motor OnOff Control Box | Option 1 Corner Motor Controls |
| Ordering Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | F | 0 | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | T | 0 | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Table Mount | T | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | F | P | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted w AirExhaust Header | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width (B) | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length (X) | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | Header | P | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | K | - | - | F | 0 | Assembly Type | Compact Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L1 | 2000mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | E | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | End Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Nominal Module Length L | 500mm | 0 | 5 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Mount for 05M End Module | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | P | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Spur Track Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L1 | 1700mm | 1 | 7 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Manual Workstation Mount | H | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | B | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Bridge Track Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Nom End Module Length L | 1500mm | 1 | 5 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| D | L | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Double Link Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| C | I | - | 0 | 0 | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Corner Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | None | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | No Drive | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | No Drive | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | 0 |
| Ordering Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz 3 Phase | 3 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 240mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Standard Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Manual Workstation Floor Mount | H | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Mount | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | T | 0 | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Table Mount | T | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | F | P | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted w AirExhaust Header | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width (B) | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length (X) | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | Header | P | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | K | - | - | F | 0 | Assembly Type | Compact Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L1 | 2000mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | E | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | End Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Nominal Module Length L | 500mm | 0 | 5 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Mount for 05M End Module | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | P | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Spur Track Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L1 | 1700mm | 1 | 7 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Manual Workstation Mount | H | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | B | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Bridge Track Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Nom End Module Length L | 1500mm | 1 | 5 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| D | L | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Double Link Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| K | L | - | 0 | 0 | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Corner Module 90 Degree | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | None | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | No Drive | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | No Drive | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| K | U | - | 0 | 0 | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Corner Module 180 Degree | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | None | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | No Drive | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | No Drive | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | 0 |
HFL2002
Pallet Sizes amp AFH Parts
Pallets 2-2HFL 2002-S
Proper positioning of Guide Pins is dependent on theTransfer Pallet length This will determine the nature ofthe pallet motion during a turn through a corner or gateand the pitch of multiple stopping positions LancorsquosPallet Motion Simulation software is available to assist inproper pin positioning
Minimum Positioning Pin spacing (A) is 20mm forpositioning in Standard Pallet Stops (Chapter 6) and 40mm for a Shock-Absorbing Pallet Stop
Consult Lanco for special pin positions not shown in thechart below
Ordering Information
Pallet Guiding amp Positioning Pins
Pallet Width Pallet Length A (mm)
B L Standard Min-Max Standard Min-Max Standard Min-Max Max
250 50 30-75 100 70-100 100 50-120 40300 50 30-75 150 120-200 100 50-120 25350 50 30-75 200 150-230 100 50-120 20400 50 30-75 230 150-230 120 50-150 20450 75 50-75 230 180-230 145 75-180 20500 100 50-75 230 200-230 170 75-180 20300 60 40-75 120 80-120 120 60-120 55350 60 40-75 180 120-200 110 60-150 40400 60 40-75 230 150-280 110 60-180 30450 60 40-75 280 150-280 110 60-200 30500 75 50-75 280 200-280 145 75-200 30350 75 50-75 150 100-250 125 75-150 70400 75 50-75 200 150-250 125 75-180 50450 75 50-75 250 180-300 125 75-210 45500 75 50-75 300 200-330 125 75-210 40
Z (mm)X (mm) Y (mm)
200
250
300
Part Number Description
1 AFH-A22-01651 Guiding Pin (w Bearing)
2 AFH-A22-02056 Positioning Pin (wout Bearing)
3 AFH-A22-01654 Retainer Standard Pin Spacing
4 AFH-A22-01653 Retainer Close Pin Spacing
5 AFH-A22-01656 Bumper 200 Wide Pallet
6 AFH-A22-01657 Bumper 250 Wide Pallet
7 AFH-A22-01658 Bumper 300 Wide Pallet
Item
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-1
Single Track Module
Single Track Modules are conveyor sections used totransport pallets in a linear direction They are typicallyconnected to other Single Tracks or to Corner Modules forturning pallets 90 or 180 degrees Floor mount tracks serveas the building blocks for Bridge Tracks and Spur TrackModules as well as Manual Workstations (see page 8-1)Table mount tracks are normally combined with StationModules for automatic assembly operations (see page 7-1)
Single Track Modules come complete with Mounts allConveyor Belts connection brackets and One (1) Drive
Standard system dimensions are shown here Customlengths are available on request
Standard speed 250 mms Other speeds are availableStandard voltages are 208 VAC 60 Hz and 400 VAC 50 Hz
Ordering Information
Floor Mounted
Table Mount
FloorManual Workstation Mount
L
B+10
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-2
Lift Gate Track ModuleTrack Mounted
Lift Gate Modules allow access to the inside of a transportsystem loop The Lift Gate takes the place of a standard10 meter Single Track Section between two other TrackSections The hinge hardware mounts to one track sectionand the latch hardware mounts to the other track section
Single Track Modules come complete with Hinge Latchhardware and an optional Gas Spring Assist Cylinder Thebelts on the Lift Gate are powered by the motor drive uniton the adjacent hinge side Track Module Conveyor beltlength is calculated based on the total length of the LiftGate plus the adjacent track section (hinge side) Seebelow
Standard system dimensions are shown here
Standard speed 250 mms Other speeds are availableStandard voltages are 208 VAC 60 Hz and 400 VAC 50 Hz
Ordering Information
Belt Length Calculation
When connecting a Lift Gate to the adjacent SingleTrack Module it is necessary to order two (2) additionalconveyor belts to provide drive to the Lift Gate byspanning both track sections These belts replace theadjacent track belts provided Refer to Page 3-7 toorder the required belts as specified below
L - 150
X+LX
B+10
L
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-20000 Lift Gate Unassisted 200 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20100 Lift Gate Unassisted 250 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20200 Lift Gate Unassisted 300 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20300 Lift Gate Assisted 200 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20400 Lift Gate Assisted 250 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20500 Lift Gate Assisted 300 mm Wide
Lift GateLengthL (mm)
AdjacentTrack LengthX (mm)
Specify 2 BeltsPart Number
(see page 3-7)
1000 500 AHK-112-23450
1000 1000 AHK-112-24450
1000 1500 AHK-112-25450
1000 2000 AHK-112-26450
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-3
Dimensions
Double Track ModuleFloor MountedDouble Track Modules are conveyor sections typically usedto create custom length Compact Loops or Spur TrackModules They can also be combined with Single TracksCorners (90 amp 180 Degree) and Manual Workstations formanual assembly operations (Section 8)
Double Track Modules come complete with Floor Mountsall Conveyor Belts connection brackets and Two (2) DrivesThe two drives can be configured to run in the same oropposite directions
Standard system dimensions are shown here Customlengths available on request
Standard speed 240 mms Other speeds are availableStandard voltage 208 V 60 Hz
Ordering Information
B+10
L
X 100
Module WidthX (mm)
Pallet Width B
200 250 300
Double Track 520 620 720
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-4
StandsNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately
Table MountAll Standard Table Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) when used with Table Modules shown inSection 7 Custom line heights are specified in the part number asshown below in millimeters Line Height is the distance from the floor to the top of the transfer system belt
Floor Mount BasicAll Standard Floor Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) Custom line heights are specified in thepart number as shown below in millimeters
Floor Mount Spur Tracks Double Tracks amp Manual WorkstationAll Standard Floor Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) Custom line heights are specified in thepart number as shown below in millimeters
Intermediate Element without StandIncluded with Standard Track Section Modules For attachment of any of the above Stands to transporttracks where no Intermediate Element is present Specify Part Number based on Track Section width
System WidthB (mm) Part Number Description
200 AFH-A21-01656 Intermediate Element 200
250 AFH-A21-01657 Intermediate Element 250
300 AFH-A21-01658 Intermediate Element 300
H2 H
1
885
X
1000
H2 = 140 mm
H2 = 265 mm
1000
885
Module WidthX (mm)
Pallet Width B
200 250 300
Single Track 520 520 520
Double Track 530 630 730
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-5
DrivesNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately
Standard Track Section Drive Units fall into two categories
Dual Belt w Constant SpeedFor typical track operation Standard belt speed is 250mmsecOther speeds are available
Single Belt w Constant SpeedFor situations in which a track section with a single belt isrequired whether as a dual rail track or single rail(ie Feeder Belts)
The drive unit for Standard Corner Modules is specified below It isused to drive a single belt with constant speed (418 mmsec) andcan also be used to drive Feeder Belts
Drives for Corner Modules (where additional units are needed)
Drives for Track (where additional units are needed)
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-92200 Drive Dual ndash 200 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-92300 Drive Dual ndash 250 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-92400 Drive Dual ndash 300 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93100 Drive Dual ndash 200 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-93200 Drive Dual ndash 250 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-93300 Drive Dual ndash 300 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-92500 Drive Single ndash 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93700 Drive Single ndash 400 VAC 50 Hz
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-92000 Drive Corner ndash 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93300 Drive Corner ndash 400 VAC 50 Hz
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-6
Conveyor BeltsNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately or when combining any Track Modules with Spur Tracks Bridge Tracks or Lift Gates
Ordering Information
Transport track without belt deflecting rollers
LT = 2 x L + 450 mm
Transport track with single pair of belt deflecting rollers at entry exit to Bridge Track
LT = 2 x L + 450 mmBelt lengths up to 25 mm longer can be accommodatedby adjusting a pulley in the drive unit
Transport track with two pair of belt deflecting rollers at entry exit to Spur Tracks
LT = 2 x L + 500 mm
Example
Transport Track Length = 10 m
LT = 2 x L + 450 mmLT = 2 x 1000 + 450 mmLT = 2450 mm
rArrPart No ARR-112-22450
Lanco belts are pre-made and labeled with Part Numberand Belt Length for ease of identification The belt feeddirection is also marked with an arrowStandard Belt Material is highly conductive SieglingExtremultus TT 51-6431-HC Black Polyamide fabricjacket and polyamide foil tension member Other beltmaterials are available for special applications
Combination of multiple transport tracks
It is possible to bridge over multiple transport tracks witha single conveyor belt saving drives This also occurswhen using a Lift Gate Track Module (Page 3-3)
The maximum combined transport track length is 3200 mm
How to order conveyor belts1 Calculate conveyor belt length
2 Specify Part No
L
L
L
HFL 2002-S Corners 4-1
Corner Modules are are typically connected to any Single orDouble Track Module and used to change the pallet directionby 90 or 180 degrees They can be used to form CompactLoops combined with Gate Modules (Chapter 5) to createcustom Spur Tracks or configured with Linear Tracks tomake serpentine or any shape systems
Corner Modules mount to each of the adjacent modules andinclude a belt drive unit angled at 45 degrees to quickly andefficiently transfer a pallet through the turn
Standard speed 418 mmsStandard voltage 208 V 60 Hz
Ordering Information
Corner Module
90ordm Corner Module 180ordm Corner Module
IO Requirements90 Deg Corner 1 Motor180 Deg Corner 2 Motors
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-1
Gating Systems
Gating Systems are an important part of the HFL 2002-STransfer System They allow pallets to be diverted from themain transport loop onto Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
This Section offers the Gating System mechanisms that areused to divert pallets into Spurs or Bridge Tracks Commonexamples of Gating Systems are shown To better clarifyhow these Gates are used it is important to understand thedefinition of Spur Tracks and Bridge Tracks
There are two types of Spur Tracks Magazines with workarea perpendicular to the main loop and Parallel Trackswith work area parallel to the main loop Both can be usedfor manual or automatic workstations By swapping In amp OutGates of a Spur Track a batch-processing cell can becreated that allows cyclic repetitions at the stations Thisalso reverses pallet orientation for access from the oppositeside Note that Spur Tracks can be placed directly on thecorners of a transport loop which helps save floor space
There are two types of Bridge Tracks In-Line Tracksused to bypass operations on a transport loop and Off-LineTracks used to create custom Spur Tracks
Gating Systems mount to Linear Track Modules (Section 3)and include switching gates pallet stops queue sensorsand Corner Modules (for parallel tracks) Pallet Coding(Section 9) is typically required to identify pallets inconjunction with Gating Systems
Overview
Magazine Spur (Middle)With Manual Workstation
Parallel Spur (Right)Reverse Loop
In-Line Bridge Track
Table Module
Corner Module
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-2
Magazine Gating
Magazine Middle Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between its Linear Tracks to the mainloop (ie there is no separation between the In amp Out Gates alongthe main loop track) A 180deg Corner Module (Section 4) fitsperfectly on the opposite end of the Magazine Magazines aretypically used for manual workstations (See page 1-3) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2) queuesensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
Magazine Middle Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Middle GateGate-Only
Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-3
Magazine Gating
Magazine Left Gates connect Magazines that have the minimumdistance possible between their Linear Tracks directly to thecorners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of theMagazine By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine thepallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite sideaccess andor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Left Gates include(1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine Left Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel DirectionPallet Travel
Direction
Magazine Left Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-4
Magazine Right Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between their Linear Tracks directly tothe corners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of whateverlength Double Track Module is used for the Spur By swappingthe In amp Out Gates on the Spur the pallet orientation can berotated (reverse loop) for opposite side access andor to performcyclic repetitions on the Spur stationsMagazine Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine GatingMagazine Right Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Right Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-5
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Middle Gates link Parallel Tracks to the transport loop atthe minimum distance allowed between the Parallel and transportloop tracks (ie there is no separation between the In-Gate andthe Corner to the Linear Track) Parallel tracks can be any length(See page 1-3 for various ways to use Parallel Tracks) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Parallel Track the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsParallel Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel Middle Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Middle Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-6
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Left Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the left cornerof the transport loop (to save space) at the minimum distanceallowed between the Parallel and transport loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesNOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module is included withreversing loopFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Left Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Left Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-7
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Right Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the rightcorner of the transport loop (to save space) at the minimumdistance allowed between the Parallel and loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestationsParallel Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3)queue sensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree CornerModules NOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module isincluded with reversing loop
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Right Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Right Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-8
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel End Gates link Parallel Tracks to the end of the transportloop (to save space) at the minimum distance allowed between theParallel and transport loop tracks Non-reversing Parallel Tracksare as wide as the transport loop (See page 1-3 for various waysto use Parallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on theParallel Track the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop)for opposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel End Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queue sensorsfor traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner Modules TheReverse Loop version includes (2) additional Corner Modules
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel End Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-9
Bridge Tracks can be In-Line (for bypassing operations on a loop)and Off-Line (for building custom Spur Tracks) In-Line BridgeGates connect Bridge Tracks to opposite sides of a transport loopBy swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Bridge Tracks the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsBridge Tracks Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic controlFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gates link custom-sized Spurs anywherealong a Linear Track Module and include (1) pneumaticallyoperated switching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) palletstops and (3) queue sensors for traffic control Custom Spurshave variable separation between the In amp Out Gates therefore anadditional Pallet Stop is included for staging pallet(s) betweenthem This minimizes pallet transfer time through the Bridge
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Modules (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Bridge Track GatingIn-Line Bridge Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
In-Line Bridge Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleForward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-10
Off-Line Bridge Right Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the rightcorner of a transport loop An additional Pallet Stop is included forstaging pallet(s) between the In amp Out Gates This minimizespallet transfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp OutGates on a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverseloop) for access or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Off-Line Bridge Left Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the leftcorner of a transport loop Custom Spurs have variable separationbetween the In amp Out Gates therefore an additional Pallet Stop isincluded for staging pallet(s) between them This minimizes pallettransfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp Out Gateson a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foraccess or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specify
bull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Bridge Track GatingOff-Line Bridge Left Gate
Off-Line Bridge Right Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate Left Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate LeftReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate Right Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate RightReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-1
Track Mounted Pallet Stops
Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
The Track Mounted Pallet Stop mounts directly to the trackprofile and includes an actuated pawl lever that preciselystops the Pallet guide pins Rails secure the pallet position inthe lateral direction An inductive sensor embedded in the railsupport verifies that the pallet pin is in position This allowsstopping on multiple pallet pins or indexing through a stationAn anti-reversing latching pawl can be added to preventupstream-applied loads from moving the pallet backwards inthe stop (see Accessories)
Pallet Stops with Long Guide Rails are used in applicationswhere the spacing between any two pallet posts is 150 mm orless Pallet Stops with Short Guide Rails are used primarilyfor pallet traffic control at gates or anywhere queuing ofpallets needs to be controlled Stops with Short Guide Railsmay also be used to position longer pallets in an automaticstation when the spacing between any two posts is greaterthan 150 mm together with a Supplemental Guide
HD Pallet Stops have a larger release cylinder and arespecified when there is a high back pressure load on the stopBack pressure is a function of pallet weight number of palletsin queue and conveyor belt speed Choose an HD PalletStop when the back pressure load exceeds 180 N
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering InformationIO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HD Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
HD Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Supplemental Guide
AAA-S22-41800 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-41900 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42000 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-42100 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-42200 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42300 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43200 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43300 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43400 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43500 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43600 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43700 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AFH-A22-00623 Supplemental Guide 200 wide
AFH-A22-00633 Supplemental Guide 250 wide
AFH-A22-00643 Supplemental Guide 300 wide
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
| Pallet Length | Pallet Width B | Pallet Width | Pallet Length | X (mm) | Y (mm) | Z (mm) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| L | 200 | 250 | 300 | B | L | Standard | Min-Max | Standard | Min-Max | Max | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250 | 200 | 250 | 50 | 30-75 | 100 | 70-120 | 25 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300 | 300 | 50 | 30-75 | 150 | 120-200 | 25 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 350 | 350 | 50 | 30-75 | 200 | 150-230 | 20 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 400 | 50 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 450 | 75 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250 | 300 | 60 | 30-75 | 120 | 80-160 | 55 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 350 | 60 | 30-75 | 180 | 120-200 | 40 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 60 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 60 | 30-75 | 280 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 280 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300 | 350 | 75 | 30-75 | 200 | 120-250 | 50 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 75 | 30-75 | 200 | 120-250 | 50 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 75 | 30-75 | 250 | 150-300 | 45 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 300 | 150-330 | 40 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| A | H | K | - | 1 | 1 | 2 | - | 2 | Assembly Type | Conveyor Belts | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Belt Length | mm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ( 2 x L ) + 450 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| B (mm) | Part Number | Description | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 200 | AFH-A21-01656 | Intermediate Element 200 | Assembly Type | Intermediate Element | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250 | AFH-A21-01657 | Intermediate Element 250 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300 | AFH-A21-01658 | Intermediate Element 300 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Stand Width | Pallet Width B | Pallet Width | Pallet Length | X (mm) | Y (mm) | Z (mm) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| X (mm) | 200 | 250 | 300 | B | L | Standard | Min-Max | Standard | Min-Max | Max | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Single Track | 530 | 530 | 530 | 200 | 300 | 50 | 30-75 | 150 | 120-200 | 25 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Double Track | 530 | 630 | 730 | 350 | 50 | 30-75 | 200 | 150-230 | 20 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 50 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 75 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250 | 350 | 60 | 30-75 | 180 | 120-200 | 40 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 60 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 60 | 30-75 | 280 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 280 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300 | 400 | 75 | 30-75 | 200 | 120-250 | 50 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 75 | 30-75 | 250 | 150-300 | 45 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 300 | 150-330 | 40 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Lift Gate | Adjacent | Specify Belts | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Length | Track Length | of Length | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| L (m) | X (mm) | (see Page 3-7) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | 500 | 3450 mm | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | 1000 | 4450 mm | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | 1500 | 5450 mm | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | 2000 | 6450 mm | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01651 | Guiding Pin (w Bearing) | Assembly Type | Pallet Parts | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-02056 | Positioning Pin (wout Bearing) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01654 | Retainer Standard Pin Spacing | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01653 | Retainer Close Pin Spacing | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01656 | Bumper 200 Wide Pallet | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01657 | Bumper 250 Wide Pallet | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01658 | Bumper 300 Wide Pallet | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AAA-S22-90600 | Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner | Assembly Type | Setup Tool | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Width | Pallet Width B | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| X (mm) | 200 | 250 | 300 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Double Track | 520 | 620 | 720 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Unit of | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Qty | Measure | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AAA-S06-59000 | 1 | Per Motor | Motor OnOff Control Box | Option 2 Motor Controls | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BEB-155-00001 | 1 | Per Track Motor | Capacitor 4uF 370V | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BBY-155-00004 5 6 | 1 | Per Motor | Quick Disconnect 5 Pole | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BBY-155-00007 | L | Ft Total Length | Bus Ribbon Cable 10 Motor Capacity | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BBY-155-00002 | 2 | Per Bus Ribbon | End Caps for Bus Ribbon Cable | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BBY-155-00003 | 1 | Per Bus Ribbon | Main Power Connector Bus Ribbon | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Unit of | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Qty | Measure | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AAA-S06-59000 | 1 | Per Motor | Motor OnOff Control Box | Option 1 Track Motor Controls | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BEB-155-00001 | 1 | Per Track Motor | Capacitor 4uF 370V | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Unit of | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Qty | Measure | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AAA-S06-59000 | 1 | Per Motor | Motor OnOff Control Box | Option 1 Corner Motor Controls |
| Ordering Information | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | F | 0 | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | T | 0 | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Table Mount | T | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | L | - | - | F | P | Assembly Type | Single Link Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted w AirExhaust Header | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width (B) | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length (X) | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | Header | P | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | K | - | - | F | 0 | Assembly Type | Compact Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L1 | 2000mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | E | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | End Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Nominal Module Length L | 500mm | 0 | 5 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Mount for 05M End Module | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | P | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Spur Track Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L1 | 1700mm | 1 | 7 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Manual Workstation Mount | H | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| S | B | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Bridge Track Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Nom End Module Length L | 1500mm | 1 | 5 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| D | L | - | - | 0 | Assembly Type | Double Link Module | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Floor Mounted | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | 1000mm | 1 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1500mm | 1 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2000mm | 2 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2500mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3000mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | 230VAC 60Hz | 2 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | 200mmsec | 1 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| No Drive | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Leg Set | Floor Mount | F | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Table Mount | T | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| C | I | - | 0 | 0 | - | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Assembly Type | Corner Module | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width B | 200mm | 2 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250mm | 2 | 5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300mm | 3 | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Length L | None | 0 | 0 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Voltage | No Drive | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Drive Speed | No Drive | 0 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Options | None | 0 | 0 |
Pallet Sizes amp AFH Parts
Pallets 2-2HFL 2002-S
Proper positioning of Guide Pins is dependent on theTransfer Pallet length This will determine the nature ofthe pallet motion during a turn through a corner or gateand the pitch of multiple stopping positions LancorsquosPallet Motion Simulation software is available to assist inproper pin positioning
Minimum Positioning Pin spacing (A) is 20mm forpositioning in Standard Pallet Stops (Chapter 6) and 40mm for a Shock-Absorbing Pallet Stop
Consult Lanco for special pin positions not shown in thechart below
Ordering Information
Pallet Guiding amp Positioning Pins
Pallet Width Pallet Length A (mm)
B L Standard Min-Max Standard Min-Max Standard Min-Max Max
250 50 30-75 100 70-100 100 50-120 40300 50 30-75 150 120-200 100 50-120 25350 50 30-75 200 150-230 100 50-120 20400 50 30-75 230 150-230 120 50-150 20450 75 50-75 230 180-230 145 75-180 20500 100 50-75 230 200-230 170 75-180 20300 60 40-75 120 80-120 120 60-120 55350 60 40-75 180 120-200 110 60-150 40400 60 40-75 230 150-280 110 60-180 30450 60 40-75 280 150-280 110 60-200 30500 75 50-75 280 200-280 145 75-200 30350 75 50-75 150 100-250 125 75-150 70400 75 50-75 200 150-250 125 75-180 50450 75 50-75 250 180-300 125 75-210 45500 75 50-75 300 200-330 125 75-210 40
Z (mm)X (mm) Y (mm)
200
250
300
Part Number Description
1 AFH-A22-01651 Guiding Pin (w Bearing)
2 AFH-A22-02056 Positioning Pin (wout Bearing)
3 AFH-A22-01654 Retainer Standard Pin Spacing
4 AFH-A22-01653 Retainer Close Pin Spacing
5 AFH-A22-01656 Bumper 200 Wide Pallet
6 AFH-A22-01657 Bumper 250 Wide Pallet
7 AFH-A22-01658 Bumper 300 Wide Pallet
Item
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-1
Single Track Module
Single Track Modules are conveyor sections used totransport pallets in a linear direction They are typicallyconnected to other Single Tracks or to Corner Modules forturning pallets 90 or 180 degrees Floor mount tracks serveas the building blocks for Bridge Tracks and Spur TrackModules as well as Manual Workstations (see page 8-1)Table mount tracks are normally combined with StationModules for automatic assembly operations (see page 7-1)
Single Track Modules come complete with Mounts allConveyor Belts connection brackets and One (1) Drive
Standard system dimensions are shown here Customlengths are available on request
Standard speed 250 mms Other speeds are availableStandard voltages are 208 VAC 60 Hz and 400 VAC 50 Hz
Ordering Information
Floor Mounted
Table Mount
FloorManual Workstation Mount
L
B+10
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-2
Lift Gate Track ModuleTrack Mounted
Lift Gate Modules allow access to the inside of a transportsystem loop The Lift Gate takes the place of a standard10 meter Single Track Section between two other TrackSections The hinge hardware mounts to one track sectionand the latch hardware mounts to the other track section
Single Track Modules come complete with Hinge Latchhardware and an optional Gas Spring Assist Cylinder Thebelts on the Lift Gate are powered by the motor drive uniton the adjacent hinge side Track Module Conveyor beltlength is calculated based on the total length of the LiftGate plus the adjacent track section (hinge side) Seebelow
Standard system dimensions are shown here
Standard speed 250 mms Other speeds are availableStandard voltages are 208 VAC 60 Hz and 400 VAC 50 Hz
Ordering Information
Belt Length Calculation
When connecting a Lift Gate to the adjacent SingleTrack Module it is necessary to order two (2) additionalconveyor belts to provide drive to the Lift Gate byspanning both track sections These belts replace theadjacent track belts provided Refer to Page 3-7 toorder the required belts as specified below
L - 150
X+LX
B+10
L
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-20000 Lift Gate Unassisted 200 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20100 Lift Gate Unassisted 250 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20200 Lift Gate Unassisted 300 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20300 Lift Gate Assisted 200 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20400 Lift Gate Assisted 250 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20500 Lift Gate Assisted 300 mm Wide
Lift GateLengthL (mm)
AdjacentTrack LengthX (mm)
Specify 2 BeltsPart Number
(see page 3-7)
1000 500 AHK-112-23450
1000 1000 AHK-112-24450
1000 1500 AHK-112-25450
1000 2000 AHK-112-26450
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-3
Dimensions
Double Track ModuleFloor MountedDouble Track Modules are conveyor sections typically usedto create custom length Compact Loops or Spur TrackModules They can also be combined with Single TracksCorners (90 amp 180 Degree) and Manual Workstations formanual assembly operations (Section 8)
Double Track Modules come complete with Floor Mountsall Conveyor Belts connection brackets and Two (2) DrivesThe two drives can be configured to run in the same oropposite directions
Standard system dimensions are shown here Customlengths available on request
Standard speed 240 mms Other speeds are availableStandard voltage 208 V 60 Hz
Ordering Information
B+10
L
X 100
Module WidthX (mm)
Pallet Width B
200 250 300
Double Track 520 620 720
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-4
StandsNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately
Table MountAll Standard Table Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) when used with Table Modules shown inSection 7 Custom line heights are specified in the part number asshown below in millimeters Line Height is the distance from the floor to the top of the transfer system belt
Floor Mount BasicAll Standard Floor Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) Custom line heights are specified in thepart number as shown below in millimeters
Floor Mount Spur Tracks Double Tracks amp Manual WorkstationAll Standard Floor Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) Custom line heights are specified in thepart number as shown below in millimeters
Intermediate Element without StandIncluded with Standard Track Section Modules For attachment of any of the above Stands to transporttracks where no Intermediate Element is present Specify Part Number based on Track Section width
System WidthB (mm) Part Number Description
200 AFH-A21-01656 Intermediate Element 200
250 AFH-A21-01657 Intermediate Element 250
300 AFH-A21-01658 Intermediate Element 300
H2 H
1
885
X
1000
H2 = 140 mm
H2 = 265 mm
1000
885
Module WidthX (mm)
Pallet Width B
200 250 300
Single Track 520 520 520
Double Track 530 630 730
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-5
DrivesNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately
Standard Track Section Drive Units fall into two categories
Dual Belt w Constant SpeedFor typical track operation Standard belt speed is 250mmsecOther speeds are available
Single Belt w Constant SpeedFor situations in which a track section with a single belt isrequired whether as a dual rail track or single rail(ie Feeder Belts)
The drive unit for Standard Corner Modules is specified below It isused to drive a single belt with constant speed (418 mmsec) andcan also be used to drive Feeder Belts
Drives for Corner Modules (where additional units are needed)
Drives for Track (where additional units are needed)
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-92200 Drive Dual ndash 200 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-92300 Drive Dual ndash 250 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-92400 Drive Dual ndash 300 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93100 Drive Dual ndash 200 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-93200 Drive Dual ndash 250 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-93300 Drive Dual ndash 300 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-92500 Drive Single ndash 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93700 Drive Single ndash 400 VAC 50 Hz
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-92000 Drive Corner ndash 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93300 Drive Corner ndash 400 VAC 50 Hz
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-6
Conveyor BeltsNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately or when combining any Track Modules with Spur Tracks Bridge Tracks or Lift Gates
Ordering Information
Transport track without belt deflecting rollers
LT = 2 x L + 450 mm
Transport track with single pair of belt deflecting rollers at entry exit to Bridge Track
LT = 2 x L + 450 mmBelt lengths up to 25 mm longer can be accommodatedby adjusting a pulley in the drive unit
Transport track with two pair of belt deflecting rollers at entry exit to Spur Tracks
LT = 2 x L + 500 mm
Example
Transport Track Length = 10 m
LT = 2 x L + 450 mmLT = 2 x 1000 + 450 mmLT = 2450 mm
rArrPart No ARR-112-22450
Lanco belts are pre-made and labeled with Part Numberand Belt Length for ease of identification The belt feeddirection is also marked with an arrowStandard Belt Material is highly conductive SieglingExtremultus TT 51-6431-HC Black Polyamide fabricjacket and polyamide foil tension member Other beltmaterials are available for special applications
Combination of multiple transport tracks
It is possible to bridge over multiple transport tracks witha single conveyor belt saving drives This also occurswhen using a Lift Gate Track Module (Page 3-3)
The maximum combined transport track length is 3200 mm
How to order conveyor belts1 Calculate conveyor belt length
2 Specify Part No
L
L
L
HFL 2002-S Corners 4-1
Corner Modules are are typically connected to any Single orDouble Track Module and used to change the pallet directionby 90 or 180 degrees They can be used to form CompactLoops combined with Gate Modules (Chapter 5) to createcustom Spur Tracks or configured with Linear Tracks tomake serpentine or any shape systems
Corner Modules mount to each of the adjacent modules andinclude a belt drive unit angled at 45 degrees to quickly andefficiently transfer a pallet through the turn
Standard speed 418 mmsStandard voltage 208 V 60 Hz
Ordering Information
Corner Module
90ordm Corner Module 180ordm Corner Module
IO Requirements90 Deg Corner 1 Motor180 Deg Corner 2 Motors
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-1
Gating Systems
Gating Systems are an important part of the HFL 2002-STransfer System They allow pallets to be diverted from themain transport loop onto Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
This Section offers the Gating System mechanisms that areused to divert pallets into Spurs or Bridge Tracks Commonexamples of Gating Systems are shown To better clarifyhow these Gates are used it is important to understand thedefinition of Spur Tracks and Bridge Tracks
There are two types of Spur Tracks Magazines with workarea perpendicular to the main loop and Parallel Trackswith work area parallel to the main loop Both can be usedfor manual or automatic workstations By swapping In amp OutGates of a Spur Track a batch-processing cell can becreated that allows cyclic repetitions at the stations Thisalso reverses pallet orientation for access from the oppositeside Note that Spur Tracks can be placed directly on thecorners of a transport loop which helps save floor space
There are two types of Bridge Tracks In-Line Tracksused to bypass operations on a transport loop and Off-LineTracks used to create custom Spur Tracks
Gating Systems mount to Linear Track Modules (Section 3)and include switching gates pallet stops queue sensorsand Corner Modules (for parallel tracks) Pallet Coding(Section 9) is typically required to identify pallets inconjunction with Gating Systems
Overview
Magazine Spur (Middle)With Manual Workstation
Parallel Spur (Right)Reverse Loop
In-Line Bridge Track
Table Module
Corner Module
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-2
Magazine Gating
Magazine Middle Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between its Linear Tracks to the mainloop (ie there is no separation between the In amp Out Gates alongthe main loop track) A 180deg Corner Module (Section 4) fitsperfectly on the opposite end of the Magazine Magazines aretypically used for manual workstations (See page 1-3) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2) queuesensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
Magazine Middle Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Middle GateGate-Only
Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-3
Magazine Gating
Magazine Left Gates connect Magazines that have the minimumdistance possible between their Linear Tracks directly to thecorners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of theMagazine By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine thepallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite sideaccess andor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Left Gates include(1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine Left Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel DirectionPallet Travel
Direction
Magazine Left Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-4
Magazine Right Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between their Linear Tracks directly tothe corners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of whateverlength Double Track Module is used for the Spur By swappingthe In amp Out Gates on the Spur the pallet orientation can berotated (reverse loop) for opposite side access andor to performcyclic repetitions on the Spur stationsMagazine Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine GatingMagazine Right Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Right Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-5
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Middle Gates link Parallel Tracks to the transport loop atthe minimum distance allowed between the Parallel and transportloop tracks (ie there is no separation between the In-Gate andthe Corner to the Linear Track) Parallel tracks can be any length(See page 1-3 for various ways to use Parallel Tracks) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Parallel Track the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsParallel Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel Middle Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Middle Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-6
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Left Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the left cornerof the transport loop (to save space) at the minimum distanceallowed between the Parallel and transport loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesNOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module is included withreversing loopFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Left Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Left Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-7
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Right Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the rightcorner of the transport loop (to save space) at the minimumdistance allowed between the Parallel and loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestationsParallel Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3)queue sensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree CornerModules NOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module isincluded with reversing loop
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Right Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Right Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-8
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel End Gates link Parallel Tracks to the end of the transportloop (to save space) at the minimum distance allowed between theParallel and transport loop tracks Non-reversing Parallel Tracksare as wide as the transport loop (See page 1-3 for various waysto use Parallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on theParallel Track the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop)for opposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel End Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queue sensorsfor traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner Modules TheReverse Loop version includes (2) additional Corner Modules
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel End Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-9
Bridge Tracks can be In-Line (for bypassing operations on a loop)and Off-Line (for building custom Spur Tracks) In-Line BridgeGates connect Bridge Tracks to opposite sides of a transport loopBy swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Bridge Tracks the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsBridge Tracks Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic controlFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gates link custom-sized Spurs anywherealong a Linear Track Module and include (1) pneumaticallyoperated switching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) palletstops and (3) queue sensors for traffic control Custom Spurshave variable separation between the In amp Out Gates therefore anadditional Pallet Stop is included for staging pallet(s) betweenthem This minimizes pallet transfer time through the Bridge
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Modules (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Bridge Track GatingIn-Line Bridge Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
In-Line Bridge Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleForward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-10
Off-Line Bridge Right Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the rightcorner of a transport loop An additional Pallet Stop is included forstaging pallet(s) between the In amp Out Gates This minimizespallet transfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp OutGates on a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverseloop) for access or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Off-Line Bridge Left Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the leftcorner of a transport loop Custom Spurs have variable separationbetween the In amp Out Gates therefore an additional Pallet Stop isincluded for staging pallet(s) between them This minimizes pallettransfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp Out Gateson a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foraccess or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specify
bull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Bridge Track GatingOff-Line Bridge Left Gate
Off-Line Bridge Right Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate Left Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate LeftReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate Right Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate RightReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-1
Track Mounted Pallet Stops
Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
The Track Mounted Pallet Stop mounts directly to the trackprofile and includes an actuated pawl lever that preciselystops the Pallet guide pins Rails secure the pallet position inthe lateral direction An inductive sensor embedded in the railsupport verifies that the pallet pin is in position This allowsstopping on multiple pallet pins or indexing through a stationAn anti-reversing latching pawl can be added to preventupstream-applied loads from moving the pallet backwards inthe stop (see Accessories)
Pallet Stops with Long Guide Rails are used in applicationswhere the spacing between any two pallet posts is 150 mm orless Pallet Stops with Short Guide Rails are used primarilyfor pallet traffic control at gates or anywhere queuing ofpallets needs to be controlled Stops with Short Guide Railsmay also be used to position longer pallets in an automaticstation when the spacing between any two posts is greaterthan 150 mm together with a Supplemental Guide
HD Pallet Stops have a larger release cylinder and arespecified when there is a high back pressure load on the stopBack pressure is a function of pallet weight number of palletsin queue and conveyor belt speed Choose an HD PalletStop when the back pressure load exceeds 180 N
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering InformationIO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HD Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
HD Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Supplemental Guide
AAA-S22-41800 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-41900 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42000 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-42100 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-42200 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42300 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43200 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43300 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43400 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43500 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43600 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43700 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AFH-A22-00623 Supplemental Guide 200 wide
AFH-A22-00633 Supplemental Guide 250 wide
AFH-A22-00643 Supplemental Guide 300 wide
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
| Pallet Length | Pallet Width B | Pallet Width | Pallet Length | X (mm) | Y (mm) | Z (mm) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| L | 200 | 250 | 300 | B | L | Standard | Min-Max | Standard | Min-Max | Max | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250 | 200 | 250 | 50 | 30-75 | 100 | 70-120 | 25 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300 | 300 | 50 | 30-75 | 150 | 120-200 | 25 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 350 | 350 | 50 | 30-75 | 200 | 150-230 | 20 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 400 | 50 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 450 | 75 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250 | 300 | 60 | 30-75 | 120 | 80-160 | 55 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 350 | 60 | 30-75 | 180 | 120-200 | 40 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 60 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 60 | 30-75 | 280 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 280 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300 | 350 | 75 | 30-75 | 200 | 120-250 | 50 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 75 | 30-75 | 200 | 120-250 | 50 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 75 | 30-75 | 250 | 150-300 | 45 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 300 | 150-330 | 40 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| A | H | K | - | 1 | 1 | 2 | - | 2 | Assembly Type | Conveyor Belts | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Belt Length | mm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ( 2 x L ) + 450 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| System Width | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| B (mm) | Part Number | Description | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 200 | AFH-A21-01656 | Intermediate Element 200 | Assembly Type | Intermediate Element | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250 | AFH-A21-01657 | Intermediate Element 250 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300 | AFH-A21-01658 | Intermediate Element 300 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Stand Width | Pallet Width B | Pallet Width | Pallet Length | X (mm) | Y (mm) | Z (mm) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| X (mm) | 200 | 250 | 300 | B | L | Standard | Min-Max | Standard | Min-Max | Max | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Single Track | 530 | 530 | 530 | 200 | 300 | 50 | 30-75 | 150 | 120-200 | 25 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Double Track | 530 | 630 | 730 | 350 | 50 | 30-75 | 200 | 150-230 | 20 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 50 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 75 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-230 | 20 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 250 | 350 | 60 | 30-75 | 180 | 120-200 | 40 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 400 | 60 | 30-75 | 230 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 60 | 30-75 | 280 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 280 | 150-280 | 30 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 300 | 400 | 75 | 30-75 | 200 | 120-250 | 50 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 450 | 75 | 30-75 | 250 | 150-300 | 45 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 500 | 75 | 30-75 | 300 | 150-330 | 40 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Lift Gate | Adjacent | Specify Belts | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Length | Track Length | of Length | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| L (m) | X (mm) | (see Page 3-7) | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | 500 | 3450 mm | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | 1000 | 4450 mm | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | 1500 | 5450 mm | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | 2000 | 6450 mm | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01651 | Guiding Pin (w Bearing) | Assembly Type | Pallet Parts | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-02056 | Positioning Pin (wout Bearing) | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01654 | Retainer Standard Pin Spacing | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01653 | Retainer Close Pin Spacing | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01656 | Bumper 200 Wide Pallet | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01657 | Bumper 250 Wide Pallet | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AFH-A22-01658 | Bumper 300 Wide Pallet | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AAA-S22-90600 | Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner | Assembly Type | Setup Tool | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Module Width | Pallet Width B | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| X (mm) | 200 | 250 | 300 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Double Track | 520 | 620 | 720 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Unit of | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Qty | Measure | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AAA-S06-59000 | 1 | Per Motor | Motor OnOff Control Box | Option 2 Motor Controls | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BEB-155-00001 | 1 | Per Track Motor | Capacitor 4uF 370V | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BBY-155-00004 5 6 | 1 | Per Motor | Quick Disconnect 5 Pole | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BBY-155-00007 | L | Ft Total Length | Bus Ribbon Cable 10 Motor Capacity | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BBY-155-00002 | 2 | Per Bus Ribbon | End Caps for Bus Ribbon Cable | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BBY-155-00003 | 1 | Per Bus Ribbon | Main Power Connector Bus Ribbon | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Unit of | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Qty | Measure | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AAA-S06-59000 | 1 | Per Motor | Motor OnOff Control Box | Option 1 Track Motor Controls | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BEB-155-00001 | 1 | Per Track Motor | Capacitor 4uF 370V | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Unit of | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Part Number | Qty | Measure | Description | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AAA-S06-59000 | 1 | Per Motor | Motor OnOff Control Box | Option 1 Corner Motor Controls |
Pallets 2-2HFL 2002-S
Proper positioning of Guide Pins is dependent on theTransfer Pallet length This will determine the nature ofthe pallet motion during a turn through a corner or gateand the pitch of multiple stopping positions LancorsquosPallet Motion Simulation software is available to assist inproper pin positioning
Minimum Positioning Pin spacing (A) is 20mm forpositioning in Standard Pallet Stops (Chapter 6) and 40mm for a Shock-Absorbing Pallet Stop
Consult Lanco for special pin positions not shown in thechart below
Ordering Information
Pallet Guiding amp Positioning Pins
Pallet Width Pallet Length A (mm)
B L Standard Min-Max Standard Min-Max Standard Min-Max Max
250 50 30-75 100 70-100 100 50-120 40300 50 30-75 150 120-200 100 50-120 25350 50 30-75 200 150-230 100 50-120 20400 50 30-75 230 150-230 120 50-150 20450 75 50-75 230 180-230 145 75-180 20500 100 50-75 230 200-230 170 75-180 20300 60 40-75 120 80-120 120 60-120 55350 60 40-75 180 120-200 110 60-150 40400 60 40-75 230 150-280 110 60-180 30450 60 40-75 280 150-280 110 60-200 30500 75 50-75 280 200-280 145 75-200 30350 75 50-75 150 100-250 125 75-150 70400 75 50-75 200 150-250 125 75-180 50450 75 50-75 250 180-300 125 75-210 45500 75 50-75 300 200-330 125 75-210 40
Z (mm)X (mm) Y (mm)
200
250
300
Part Number Description
1 AFH-A22-01651 Guiding Pin (w Bearing)
2 AFH-A22-02056 Positioning Pin (wout Bearing)
3 AFH-A22-01654 Retainer Standard Pin Spacing
4 AFH-A22-01653 Retainer Close Pin Spacing
5 AFH-A22-01656 Bumper 200 Wide Pallet
6 AFH-A22-01657 Bumper 250 Wide Pallet
7 AFH-A22-01658 Bumper 300 Wide Pallet
Item
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-1
Single Track Module
Single Track Modules are conveyor sections used totransport pallets in a linear direction They are typicallyconnected to other Single Tracks or to Corner Modules forturning pallets 90 or 180 degrees Floor mount tracks serveas the building blocks for Bridge Tracks and Spur TrackModules as well as Manual Workstations (see page 8-1)Table mount tracks are normally combined with StationModules for automatic assembly operations (see page 7-1)
Single Track Modules come complete with Mounts allConveyor Belts connection brackets and One (1) Drive
Standard system dimensions are shown here Customlengths are available on request
Standard speed 250 mms Other speeds are availableStandard voltages are 208 VAC 60 Hz and 400 VAC 50 Hz
Ordering Information
Floor Mounted
Table Mount
FloorManual Workstation Mount
L
B+10
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-2
Lift Gate Track ModuleTrack Mounted
Lift Gate Modules allow access to the inside of a transportsystem loop The Lift Gate takes the place of a standard10 meter Single Track Section between two other TrackSections The hinge hardware mounts to one track sectionand the latch hardware mounts to the other track section
Single Track Modules come complete with Hinge Latchhardware and an optional Gas Spring Assist Cylinder Thebelts on the Lift Gate are powered by the motor drive uniton the adjacent hinge side Track Module Conveyor beltlength is calculated based on the total length of the LiftGate plus the adjacent track section (hinge side) Seebelow
Standard system dimensions are shown here
Standard speed 250 mms Other speeds are availableStandard voltages are 208 VAC 60 Hz and 400 VAC 50 Hz
Ordering Information
Belt Length Calculation
When connecting a Lift Gate to the adjacent SingleTrack Module it is necessary to order two (2) additionalconveyor belts to provide drive to the Lift Gate byspanning both track sections These belts replace theadjacent track belts provided Refer to Page 3-7 toorder the required belts as specified below
L - 150
X+LX
B+10
L
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-20000 Lift Gate Unassisted 200 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20100 Lift Gate Unassisted 250 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20200 Lift Gate Unassisted 300 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20300 Lift Gate Assisted 200 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20400 Lift Gate Assisted 250 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20500 Lift Gate Assisted 300 mm Wide
Lift GateLengthL (mm)
AdjacentTrack LengthX (mm)
Specify 2 BeltsPart Number
(see page 3-7)
1000 500 AHK-112-23450
1000 1000 AHK-112-24450
1000 1500 AHK-112-25450
1000 2000 AHK-112-26450
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-3
Dimensions
Double Track ModuleFloor MountedDouble Track Modules are conveyor sections typically usedto create custom length Compact Loops or Spur TrackModules They can also be combined with Single TracksCorners (90 amp 180 Degree) and Manual Workstations formanual assembly operations (Section 8)
Double Track Modules come complete with Floor Mountsall Conveyor Belts connection brackets and Two (2) DrivesThe two drives can be configured to run in the same oropposite directions
Standard system dimensions are shown here Customlengths available on request
Standard speed 240 mms Other speeds are availableStandard voltage 208 V 60 Hz
Ordering Information
B+10
L
X 100
Module WidthX (mm)
Pallet Width B
200 250 300
Double Track 520 620 720
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-4
StandsNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately
Table MountAll Standard Table Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) when used with Table Modules shown inSection 7 Custom line heights are specified in the part number asshown below in millimeters Line Height is the distance from the floor to the top of the transfer system belt
Floor Mount BasicAll Standard Floor Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) Custom line heights are specified in thepart number as shown below in millimeters
Floor Mount Spur Tracks Double Tracks amp Manual WorkstationAll Standard Floor Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) Custom line heights are specified in thepart number as shown below in millimeters
Intermediate Element without StandIncluded with Standard Track Section Modules For attachment of any of the above Stands to transporttracks where no Intermediate Element is present Specify Part Number based on Track Section width
System WidthB (mm) Part Number Description
200 AFH-A21-01656 Intermediate Element 200
250 AFH-A21-01657 Intermediate Element 250
300 AFH-A21-01658 Intermediate Element 300
H2 H
1
885
X
1000
H2 = 140 mm
H2 = 265 mm
1000
885
Module WidthX (mm)
Pallet Width B
200 250 300
Single Track 520 520 520
Double Track 530 630 730
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-5
DrivesNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately
Standard Track Section Drive Units fall into two categories
Dual Belt w Constant SpeedFor typical track operation Standard belt speed is 250mmsecOther speeds are available
Single Belt w Constant SpeedFor situations in which a track section with a single belt isrequired whether as a dual rail track or single rail(ie Feeder Belts)
The drive unit for Standard Corner Modules is specified below It isused to drive a single belt with constant speed (418 mmsec) andcan also be used to drive Feeder Belts
Drives for Corner Modules (where additional units are needed)
Drives for Track (where additional units are needed)
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-92200 Drive Dual ndash 200 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-92300 Drive Dual ndash 250 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-92400 Drive Dual ndash 300 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93100 Drive Dual ndash 200 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-93200 Drive Dual ndash 250 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-93300 Drive Dual ndash 300 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-92500 Drive Single ndash 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93700 Drive Single ndash 400 VAC 50 Hz
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-92000 Drive Corner ndash 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93300 Drive Corner ndash 400 VAC 50 Hz
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-6
Conveyor BeltsNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately or when combining any Track Modules with Spur Tracks Bridge Tracks or Lift Gates
Ordering Information
Transport track without belt deflecting rollers
LT = 2 x L + 450 mm
Transport track with single pair of belt deflecting rollers at entry exit to Bridge Track
LT = 2 x L + 450 mmBelt lengths up to 25 mm longer can be accommodatedby adjusting a pulley in the drive unit
Transport track with two pair of belt deflecting rollers at entry exit to Spur Tracks
LT = 2 x L + 500 mm
Example
Transport Track Length = 10 m
LT = 2 x L + 450 mmLT = 2 x 1000 + 450 mmLT = 2450 mm
rArrPart No ARR-112-22450
Lanco belts are pre-made and labeled with Part Numberand Belt Length for ease of identification The belt feeddirection is also marked with an arrowStandard Belt Material is highly conductive SieglingExtremultus TT 51-6431-HC Black Polyamide fabricjacket and polyamide foil tension member Other beltmaterials are available for special applications
Combination of multiple transport tracks
It is possible to bridge over multiple transport tracks witha single conveyor belt saving drives This also occurswhen using a Lift Gate Track Module (Page 3-3)
The maximum combined transport track length is 3200 mm
How to order conveyor belts1 Calculate conveyor belt length
2 Specify Part No
L
L
L
HFL 2002-S Corners 4-1
Corner Modules are are typically connected to any Single orDouble Track Module and used to change the pallet directionby 90 or 180 degrees They can be used to form CompactLoops combined with Gate Modules (Chapter 5) to createcustom Spur Tracks or configured with Linear Tracks tomake serpentine or any shape systems
Corner Modules mount to each of the adjacent modules andinclude a belt drive unit angled at 45 degrees to quickly andefficiently transfer a pallet through the turn
Standard speed 418 mmsStandard voltage 208 V 60 Hz
Ordering Information
Corner Module
90ordm Corner Module 180ordm Corner Module
IO Requirements90 Deg Corner 1 Motor180 Deg Corner 2 Motors
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-1
Gating Systems
Gating Systems are an important part of the HFL 2002-STransfer System They allow pallets to be diverted from themain transport loop onto Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
This Section offers the Gating System mechanisms that areused to divert pallets into Spurs or Bridge Tracks Commonexamples of Gating Systems are shown To better clarifyhow these Gates are used it is important to understand thedefinition of Spur Tracks and Bridge Tracks
There are two types of Spur Tracks Magazines with workarea perpendicular to the main loop and Parallel Trackswith work area parallel to the main loop Both can be usedfor manual or automatic workstations By swapping In amp OutGates of a Spur Track a batch-processing cell can becreated that allows cyclic repetitions at the stations Thisalso reverses pallet orientation for access from the oppositeside Note that Spur Tracks can be placed directly on thecorners of a transport loop which helps save floor space
There are two types of Bridge Tracks In-Line Tracksused to bypass operations on a transport loop and Off-LineTracks used to create custom Spur Tracks
Gating Systems mount to Linear Track Modules (Section 3)and include switching gates pallet stops queue sensorsand Corner Modules (for parallel tracks) Pallet Coding(Section 9) is typically required to identify pallets inconjunction with Gating Systems
Overview
Magazine Spur (Middle)With Manual Workstation
Parallel Spur (Right)Reverse Loop
In-Line Bridge Track
Table Module
Corner Module
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-2
Magazine Gating
Magazine Middle Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between its Linear Tracks to the mainloop (ie there is no separation between the In amp Out Gates alongthe main loop track) A 180deg Corner Module (Section 4) fitsperfectly on the opposite end of the Magazine Magazines aretypically used for manual workstations (See page 1-3) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2) queuesensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
Magazine Middle Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Middle GateGate-Only
Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-3
Magazine Gating
Magazine Left Gates connect Magazines that have the minimumdistance possible between their Linear Tracks directly to thecorners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of theMagazine By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine thepallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite sideaccess andor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Left Gates include(1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine Left Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel DirectionPallet Travel
Direction
Magazine Left Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-4
Magazine Right Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between their Linear Tracks directly tothe corners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of whateverlength Double Track Module is used for the Spur By swappingthe In amp Out Gates on the Spur the pallet orientation can berotated (reverse loop) for opposite side access andor to performcyclic repetitions on the Spur stationsMagazine Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine GatingMagazine Right Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Right Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-5
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Middle Gates link Parallel Tracks to the transport loop atthe minimum distance allowed between the Parallel and transportloop tracks (ie there is no separation between the In-Gate andthe Corner to the Linear Track) Parallel tracks can be any length(See page 1-3 for various ways to use Parallel Tracks) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Parallel Track the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsParallel Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel Middle Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Middle Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-6
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Left Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the left cornerof the transport loop (to save space) at the minimum distanceallowed between the Parallel and transport loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesNOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module is included withreversing loopFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Left Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Left Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-7
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Right Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the rightcorner of the transport loop (to save space) at the minimumdistance allowed between the Parallel and loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestationsParallel Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3)queue sensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree CornerModules NOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module isincluded with reversing loop
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Right Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Right Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-8
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel End Gates link Parallel Tracks to the end of the transportloop (to save space) at the minimum distance allowed between theParallel and transport loop tracks Non-reversing Parallel Tracksare as wide as the transport loop (See page 1-3 for various waysto use Parallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on theParallel Track the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop)for opposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel End Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queue sensorsfor traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner Modules TheReverse Loop version includes (2) additional Corner Modules
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel End Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-9
Bridge Tracks can be In-Line (for bypassing operations on a loop)and Off-Line (for building custom Spur Tracks) In-Line BridgeGates connect Bridge Tracks to opposite sides of a transport loopBy swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Bridge Tracks the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsBridge Tracks Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic controlFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gates link custom-sized Spurs anywherealong a Linear Track Module and include (1) pneumaticallyoperated switching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) palletstops and (3) queue sensors for traffic control Custom Spurshave variable separation between the In amp Out Gates therefore anadditional Pallet Stop is included for staging pallet(s) betweenthem This minimizes pallet transfer time through the Bridge
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Modules (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Bridge Track GatingIn-Line Bridge Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
In-Line Bridge Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleForward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-10
Off-Line Bridge Right Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the rightcorner of a transport loop An additional Pallet Stop is included forstaging pallet(s) between the In amp Out Gates This minimizespallet transfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp OutGates on a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverseloop) for access or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Off-Line Bridge Left Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the leftcorner of a transport loop Custom Spurs have variable separationbetween the In amp Out Gates therefore an additional Pallet Stop isincluded for staging pallet(s) between them This minimizes pallettransfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp Out Gateson a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foraccess or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specify
bull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Bridge Track GatingOff-Line Bridge Left Gate
Off-Line Bridge Right Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate Left Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate LeftReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate Right Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate RightReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-1
Track Mounted Pallet Stops
Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
The Track Mounted Pallet Stop mounts directly to the trackprofile and includes an actuated pawl lever that preciselystops the Pallet guide pins Rails secure the pallet position inthe lateral direction An inductive sensor embedded in the railsupport verifies that the pallet pin is in position This allowsstopping on multiple pallet pins or indexing through a stationAn anti-reversing latching pawl can be added to preventupstream-applied loads from moving the pallet backwards inthe stop (see Accessories)
Pallet Stops with Long Guide Rails are used in applicationswhere the spacing between any two pallet posts is 150 mm orless Pallet Stops with Short Guide Rails are used primarilyfor pallet traffic control at gates or anywhere queuing ofpallets needs to be controlled Stops with Short Guide Railsmay also be used to position longer pallets in an automaticstation when the spacing between any two posts is greaterthan 150 mm together with a Supplemental Guide
HD Pallet Stops have a larger release cylinder and arespecified when there is a high back pressure load on the stopBack pressure is a function of pallet weight number of palletsin queue and conveyor belt speed Choose an HD PalletStop when the back pressure load exceeds 180 N
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering InformationIO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HD Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
HD Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Supplemental Guide
AAA-S22-41800 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-41900 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42000 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-42100 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-42200 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42300 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43200 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43300 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43400 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43500 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43600 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43700 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AFH-A22-00623 Supplemental Guide 200 wide
AFH-A22-00633 Supplemental Guide 250 wide
AFH-A22-00643 Supplemental Guide 300 wide
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-1
Single Track Module
Single Track Modules are conveyor sections used totransport pallets in a linear direction They are typicallyconnected to other Single Tracks or to Corner Modules forturning pallets 90 or 180 degrees Floor mount tracks serveas the building blocks for Bridge Tracks and Spur TrackModules as well as Manual Workstations (see page 8-1)Table mount tracks are normally combined with StationModules for automatic assembly operations (see page 7-1)
Single Track Modules come complete with Mounts allConveyor Belts connection brackets and One (1) Drive
Standard system dimensions are shown here Customlengths are available on request
Standard speed 250 mms Other speeds are availableStandard voltages are 208 VAC 60 Hz and 400 VAC 50 Hz
Ordering Information
Floor Mounted
Table Mount
FloorManual Workstation Mount
L
B+10
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-2
Lift Gate Track ModuleTrack Mounted
Lift Gate Modules allow access to the inside of a transportsystem loop The Lift Gate takes the place of a standard10 meter Single Track Section between two other TrackSections The hinge hardware mounts to one track sectionand the latch hardware mounts to the other track section
Single Track Modules come complete with Hinge Latchhardware and an optional Gas Spring Assist Cylinder Thebelts on the Lift Gate are powered by the motor drive uniton the adjacent hinge side Track Module Conveyor beltlength is calculated based on the total length of the LiftGate plus the adjacent track section (hinge side) Seebelow
Standard system dimensions are shown here
Standard speed 250 mms Other speeds are availableStandard voltages are 208 VAC 60 Hz and 400 VAC 50 Hz
Ordering Information
Belt Length Calculation
When connecting a Lift Gate to the adjacent SingleTrack Module it is necessary to order two (2) additionalconveyor belts to provide drive to the Lift Gate byspanning both track sections These belts replace theadjacent track belts provided Refer to Page 3-7 toorder the required belts as specified below
L - 150
X+LX
B+10
L
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-20000 Lift Gate Unassisted 200 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20100 Lift Gate Unassisted 250 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20200 Lift Gate Unassisted 300 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20300 Lift Gate Assisted 200 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20400 Lift Gate Assisted 250 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20500 Lift Gate Assisted 300 mm Wide
Lift GateLengthL (mm)
AdjacentTrack LengthX (mm)
Specify 2 BeltsPart Number
(see page 3-7)
1000 500 AHK-112-23450
1000 1000 AHK-112-24450
1000 1500 AHK-112-25450
1000 2000 AHK-112-26450
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-3
Dimensions
Double Track ModuleFloor MountedDouble Track Modules are conveyor sections typically usedto create custom length Compact Loops or Spur TrackModules They can also be combined with Single TracksCorners (90 amp 180 Degree) and Manual Workstations formanual assembly operations (Section 8)
Double Track Modules come complete with Floor Mountsall Conveyor Belts connection brackets and Two (2) DrivesThe two drives can be configured to run in the same oropposite directions
Standard system dimensions are shown here Customlengths available on request
Standard speed 240 mms Other speeds are availableStandard voltage 208 V 60 Hz
Ordering Information
B+10
L
X 100
Module WidthX (mm)
Pallet Width B
200 250 300
Double Track 520 620 720
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-4
StandsNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately
Table MountAll Standard Table Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) when used with Table Modules shown inSection 7 Custom line heights are specified in the part number asshown below in millimeters Line Height is the distance from the floor to the top of the transfer system belt
Floor Mount BasicAll Standard Floor Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) Custom line heights are specified in thepart number as shown below in millimeters
Floor Mount Spur Tracks Double Tracks amp Manual WorkstationAll Standard Floor Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) Custom line heights are specified in thepart number as shown below in millimeters
Intermediate Element without StandIncluded with Standard Track Section Modules For attachment of any of the above Stands to transporttracks where no Intermediate Element is present Specify Part Number based on Track Section width
System WidthB (mm) Part Number Description
200 AFH-A21-01656 Intermediate Element 200
250 AFH-A21-01657 Intermediate Element 250
300 AFH-A21-01658 Intermediate Element 300
H2 H
1
885
X
1000
H2 = 140 mm
H2 = 265 mm
1000
885
Module WidthX (mm)
Pallet Width B
200 250 300
Single Track 520 520 520
Double Track 530 630 730
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-5
DrivesNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately
Standard Track Section Drive Units fall into two categories
Dual Belt w Constant SpeedFor typical track operation Standard belt speed is 250mmsecOther speeds are available
Single Belt w Constant SpeedFor situations in which a track section with a single belt isrequired whether as a dual rail track or single rail(ie Feeder Belts)
The drive unit for Standard Corner Modules is specified below It isused to drive a single belt with constant speed (418 mmsec) andcan also be used to drive Feeder Belts
Drives for Corner Modules (where additional units are needed)
Drives for Track (where additional units are needed)
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-92200 Drive Dual ndash 200 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-92300 Drive Dual ndash 250 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-92400 Drive Dual ndash 300 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93100 Drive Dual ndash 200 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-93200 Drive Dual ndash 250 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-93300 Drive Dual ndash 300 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-92500 Drive Single ndash 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93700 Drive Single ndash 400 VAC 50 Hz
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-92000 Drive Corner ndash 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93300 Drive Corner ndash 400 VAC 50 Hz
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-6
Conveyor BeltsNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately or when combining any Track Modules with Spur Tracks Bridge Tracks or Lift Gates
Ordering Information
Transport track without belt deflecting rollers
LT = 2 x L + 450 mm
Transport track with single pair of belt deflecting rollers at entry exit to Bridge Track
LT = 2 x L + 450 mmBelt lengths up to 25 mm longer can be accommodatedby adjusting a pulley in the drive unit
Transport track with two pair of belt deflecting rollers at entry exit to Spur Tracks
LT = 2 x L + 500 mm
Example
Transport Track Length = 10 m
LT = 2 x L + 450 mmLT = 2 x 1000 + 450 mmLT = 2450 mm
rArrPart No ARR-112-22450
Lanco belts are pre-made and labeled with Part Numberand Belt Length for ease of identification The belt feeddirection is also marked with an arrowStandard Belt Material is highly conductive SieglingExtremultus TT 51-6431-HC Black Polyamide fabricjacket and polyamide foil tension member Other beltmaterials are available for special applications
Combination of multiple transport tracks
It is possible to bridge over multiple transport tracks witha single conveyor belt saving drives This also occurswhen using a Lift Gate Track Module (Page 3-3)
The maximum combined transport track length is 3200 mm
How to order conveyor belts1 Calculate conveyor belt length
2 Specify Part No
L
L
L
HFL 2002-S Corners 4-1
Corner Modules are are typically connected to any Single orDouble Track Module and used to change the pallet directionby 90 or 180 degrees They can be used to form CompactLoops combined with Gate Modules (Chapter 5) to createcustom Spur Tracks or configured with Linear Tracks tomake serpentine or any shape systems
Corner Modules mount to each of the adjacent modules andinclude a belt drive unit angled at 45 degrees to quickly andefficiently transfer a pallet through the turn
Standard speed 418 mmsStandard voltage 208 V 60 Hz
Ordering Information
Corner Module
90ordm Corner Module 180ordm Corner Module
IO Requirements90 Deg Corner 1 Motor180 Deg Corner 2 Motors
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-1
Gating Systems
Gating Systems are an important part of the HFL 2002-STransfer System They allow pallets to be diverted from themain transport loop onto Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
This Section offers the Gating System mechanisms that areused to divert pallets into Spurs or Bridge Tracks Commonexamples of Gating Systems are shown To better clarifyhow these Gates are used it is important to understand thedefinition of Spur Tracks and Bridge Tracks
There are two types of Spur Tracks Magazines with workarea perpendicular to the main loop and Parallel Trackswith work area parallel to the main loop Both can be usedfor manual or automatic workstations By swapping In amp OutGates of a Spur Track a batch-processing cell can becreated that allows cyclic repetitions at the stations Thisalso reverses pallet orientation for access from the oppositeside Note that Spur Tracks can be placed directly on thecorners of a transport loop which helps save floor space
There are two types of Bridge Tracks In-Line Tracksused to bypass operations on a transport loop and Off-LineTracks used to create custom Spur Tracks
Gating Systems mount to Linear Track Modules (Section 3)and include switching gates pallet stops queue sensorsand Corner Modules (for parallel tracks) Pallet Coding(Section 9) is typically required to identify pallets inconjunction with Gating Systems
Overview
Magazine Spur (Middle)With Manual Workstation
Parallel Spur (Right)Reverse Loop
In-Line Bridge Track
Table Module
Corner Module
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-2
Magazine Gating
Magazine Middle Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between its Linear Tracks to the mainloop (ie there is no separation between the In amp Out Gates alongthe main loop track) A 180deg Corner Module (Section 4) fitsperfectly on the opposite end of the Magazine Magazines aretypically used for manual workstations (See page 1-3) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2) queuesensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
Magazine Middle Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Middle GateGate-Only
Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-3
Magazine Gating
Magazine Left Gates connect Magazines that have the minimumdistance possible between their Linear Tracks directly to thecorners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of theMagazine By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine thepallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite sideaccess andor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Left Gates include(1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine Left Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel DirectionPallet Travel
Direction
Magazine Left Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-4
Magazine Right Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between their Linear Tracks directly tothe corners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of whateverlength Double Track Module is used for the Spur By swappingthe In amp Out Gates on the Spur the pallet orientation can berotated (reverse loop) for opposite side access andor to performcyclic repetitions on the Spur stationsMagazine Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine GatingMagazine Right Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Right Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-5
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Middle Gates link Parallel Tracks to the transport loop atthe minimum distance allowed between the Parallel and transportloop tracks (ie there is no separation between the In-Gate andthe Corner to the Linear Track) Parallel tracks can be any length(See page 1-3 for various ways to use Parallel Tracks) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Parallel Track the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsParallel Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel Middle Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Middle Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-6
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Left Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the left cornerof the transport loop (to save space) at the minimum distanceallowed between the Parallel and transport loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesNOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module is included withreversing loopFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Left Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Left Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-7
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Right Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the rightcorner of the transport loop (to save space) at the minimumdistance allowed between the Parallel and loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestationsParallel Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3)queue sensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree CornerModules NOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module isincluded with reversing loop
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Right Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Right Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-8
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel End Gates link Parallel Tracks to the end of the transportloop (to save space) at the minimum distance allowed between theParallel and transport loop tracks Non-reversing Parallel Tracksare as wide as the transport loop (See page 1-3 for various waysto use Parallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on theParallel Track the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop)for opposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel End Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queue sensorsfor traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner Modules TheReverse Loop version includes (2) additional Corner Modules
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel End Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-9
Bridge Tracks can be In-Line (for bypassing operations on a loop)and Off-Line (for building custom Spur Tracks) In-Line BridgeGates connect Bridge Tracks to opposite sides of a transport loopBy swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Bridge Tracks the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsBridge Tracks Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic controlFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gates link custom-sized Spurs anywherealong a Linear Track Module and include (1) pneumaticallyoperated switching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) palletstops and (3) queue sensors for traffic control Custom Spurshave variable separation between the In amp Out Gates therefore anadditional Pallet Stop is included for staging pallet(s) betweenthem This minimizes pallet transfer time through the Bridge
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Modules (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Bridge Track GatingIn-Line Bridge Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
In-Line Bridge Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleForward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-10
Off-Line Bridge Right Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the rightcorner of a transport loop An additional Pallet Stop is included forstaging pallet(s) between the In amp Out Gates This minimizespallet transfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp OutGates on a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverseloop) for access or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Off-Line Bridge Left Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the leftcorner of a transport loop Custom Spurs have variable separationbetween the In amp Out Gates therefore an additional Pallet Stop isincluded for staging pallet(s) between them This minimizes pallettransfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp Out Gateson a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foraccess or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specify
bull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Bridge Track GatingOff-Line Bridge Left Gate
Off-Line Bridge Right Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate Left Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate LeftReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate Right Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate RightReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-1
Track Mounted Pallet Stops
Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
The Track Mounted Pallet Stop mounts directly to the trackprofile and includes an actuated pawl lever that preciselystops the Pallet guide pins Rails secure the pallet position inthe lateral direction An inductive sensor embedded in the railsupport verifies that the pallet pin is in position This allowsstopping on multiple pallet pins or indexing through a stationAn anti-reversing latching pawl can be added to preventupstream-applied loads from moving the pallet backwards inthe stop (see Accessories)
Pallet Stops with Long Guide Rails are used in applicationswhere the spacing between any two pallet posts is 150 mm orless Pallet Stops with Short Guide Rails are used primarilyfor pallet traffic control at gates or anywhere queuing ofpallets needs to be controlled Stops with Short Guide Railsmay also be used to position longer pallets in an automaticstation when the spacing between any two posts is greaterthan 150 mm together with a Supplemental Guide
HD Pallet Stops have a larger release cylinder and arespecified when there is a high back pressure load on the stopBack pressure is a function of pallet weight number of palletsin queue and conveyor belt speed Choose an HD PalletStop when the back pressure load exceeds 180 N
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering InformationIO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HD Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
HD Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Supplemental Guide
AAA-S22-41800 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-41900 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42000 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-42100 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-42200 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42300 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43200 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43300 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43400 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43500 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43600 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43700 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AFH-A22-00623 Supplemental Guide 200 wide
AFH-A22-00633 Supplemental Guide 250 wide
AFH-A22-00643 Supplemental Guide 300 wide
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-2
Lift Gate Track ModuleTrack Mounted
Lift Gate Modules allow access to the inside of a transportsystem loop The Lift Gate takes the place of a standard10 meter Single Track Section between two other TrackSections The hinge hardware mounts to one track sectionand the latch hardware mounts to the other track section
Single Track Modules come complete with Hinge Latchhardware and an optional Gas Spring Assist Cylinder Thebelts on the Lift Gate are powered by the motor drive uniton the adjacent hinge side Track Module Conveyor beltlength is calculated based on the total length of the LiftGate plus the adjacent track section (hinge side) Seebelow
Standard system dimensions are shown here
Standard speed 250 mms Other speeds are availableStandard voltages are 208 VAC 60 Hz and 400 VAC 50 Hz
Ordering Information
Belt Length Calculation
When connecting a Lift Gate to the adjacent SingleTrack Module it is necessary to order two (2) additionalconveyor belts to provide drive to the Lift Gate byspanning both track sections These belts replace theadjacent track belts provided Refer to Page 3-7 toorder the required belts as specified below
L - 150
X+LX
B+10
L
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-20000 Lift Gate Unassisted 200 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20100 Lift Gate Unassisted 250 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20200 Lift Gate Unassisted 300 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20300 Lift Gate Assisted 200 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20400 Lift Gate Assisted 250 mm Wide
AAA-S22-20500 Lift Gate Assisted 300 mm Wide
Lift GateLengthL (mm)
AdjacentTrack LengthX (mm)
Specify 2 BeltsPart Number
(see page 3-7)
1000 500 AHK-112-23450
1000 1000 AHK-112-24450
1000 1500 AHK-112-25450
1000 2000 AHK-112-26450
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-3
Dimensions
Double Track ModuleFloor MountedDouble Track Modules are conveyor sections typically usedto create custom length Compact Loops or Spur TrackModules They can also be combined with Single TracksCorners (90 amp 180 Degree) and Manual Workstations formanual assembly operations (Section 8)
Double Track Modules come complete with Floor Mountsall Conveyor Belts connection brackets and Two (2) DrivesThe two drives can be configured to run in the same oropposite directions
Standard system dimensions are shown here Customlengths available on request
Standard speed 240 mms Other speeds are availableStandard voltage 208 V 60 Hz
Ordering Information
B+10
L
X 100
Module WidthX (mm)
Pallet Width B
200 250 300
Double Track 520 620 720
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-4
StandsNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately
Table MountAll Standard Table Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) when used with Table Modules shown inSection 7 Custom line heights are specified in the part number asshown below in millimeters Line Height is the distance from the floor to the top of the transfer system belt
Floor Mount BasicAll Standard Floor Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) Custom line heights are specified in thepart number as shown below in millimeters
Floor Mount Spur Tracks Double Tracks amp Manual WorkstationAll Standard Floor Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) Custom line heights are specified in thepart number as shown below in millimeters
Intermediate Element without StandIncluded with Standard Track Section Modules For attachment of any of the above Stands to transporttracks where no Intermediate Element is present Specify Part Number based on Track Section width
System WidthB (mm) Part Number Description
200 AFH-A21-01656 Intermediate Element 200
250 AFH-A21-01657 Intermediate Element 250
300 AFH-A21-01658 Intermediate Element 300
H2 H
1
885
X
1000
H2 = 140 mm
H2 = 265 mm
1000
885
Module WidthX (mm)
Pallet Width B
200 250 300
Single Track 520 520 520
Double Track 530 630 730
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-5
DrivesNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately
Standard Track Section Drive Units fall into two categories
Dual Belt w Constant SpeedFor typical track operation Standard belt speed is 250mmsecOther speeds are available
Single Belt w Constant SpeedFor situations in which a track section with a single belt isrequired whether as a dual rail track or single rail(ie Feeder Belts)
The drive unit for Standard Corner Modules is specified below It isused to drive a single belt with constant speed (418 mmsec) andcan also be used to drive Feeder Belts
Drives for Corner Modules (where additional units are needed)
Drives for Track (where additional units are needed)
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-92200 Drive Dual ndash 200 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-92300 Drive Dual ndash 250 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-92400 Drive Dual ndash 300 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93100 Drive Dual ndash 200 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-93200 Drive Dual ndash 250 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-93300 Drive Dual ndash 300 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-92500 Drive Single ndash 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93700 Drive Single ndash 400 VAC 50 Hz
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-92000 Drive Corner ndash 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93300 Drive Corner ndash 400 VAC 50 Hz
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-6
Conveyor BeltsNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately or when combining any Track Modules with Spur Tracks Bridge Tracks or Lift Gates
Ordering Information
Transport track without belt deflecting rollers
LT = 2 x L + 450 mm
Transport track with single pair of belt deflecting rollers at entry exit to Bridge Track
LT = 2 x L + 450 mmBelt lengths up to 25 mm longer can be accommodatedby adjusting a pulley in the drive unit
Transport track with two pair of belt deflecting rollers at entry exit to Spur Tracks
LT = 2 x L + 500 mm
Example
Transport Track Length = 10 m
LT = 2 x L + 450 mmLT = 2 x 1000 + 450 mmLT = 2450 mm
rArrPart No ARR-112-22450
Lanco belts are pre-made and labeled with Part Numberand Belt Length for ease of identification The belt feeddirection is also marked with an arrowStandard Belt Material is highly conductive SieglingExtremultus TT 51-6431-HC Black Polyamide fabricjacket and polyamide foil tension member Other beltmaterials are available for special applications
Combination of multiple transport tracks
It is possible to bridge over multiple transport tracks witha single conveyor belt saving drives This also occurswhen using a Lift Gate Track Module (Page 3-3)
The maximum combined transport track length is 3200 mm
How to order conveyor belts1 Calculate conveyor belt length
2 Specify Part No
L
L
L
HFL 2002-S Corners 4-1
Corner Modules are are typically connected to any Single orDouble Track Module and used to change the pallet directionby 90 or 180 degrees They can be used to form CompactLoops combined with Gate Modules (Chapter 5) to createcustom Spur Tracks or configured with Linear Tracks tomake serpentine or any shape systems
Corner Modules mount to each of the adjacent modules andinclude a belt drive unit angled at 45 degrees to quickly andefficiently transfer a pallet through the turn
Standard speed 418 mmsStandard voltage 208 V 60 Hz
Ordering Information
Corner Module
90ordm Corner Module 180ordm Corner Module
IO Requirements90 Deg Corner 1 Motor180 Deg Corner 2 Motors
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-1
Gating Systems
Gating Systems are an important part of the HFL 2002-STransfer System They allow pallets to be diverted from themain transport loop onto Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
This Section offers the Gating System mechanisms that areused to divert pallets into Spurs or Bridge Tracks Commonexamples of Gating Systems are shown To better clarifyhow these Gates are used it is important to understand thedefinition of Spur Tracks and Bridge Tracks
There are two types of Spur Tracks Magazines with workarea perpendicular to the main loop and Parallel Trackswith work area parallel to the main loop Both can be usedfor manual or automatic workstations By swapping In amp OutGates of a Spur Track a batch-processing cell can becreated that allows cyclic repetitions at the stations Thisalso reverses pallet orientation for access from the oppositeside Note that Spur Tracks can be placed directly on thecorners of a transport loop which helps save floor space
There are two types of Bridge Tracks In-Line Tracksused to bypass operations on a transport loop and Off-LineTracks used to create custom Spur Tracks
Gating Systems mount to Linear Track Modules (Section 3)and include switching gates pallet stops queue sensorsand Corner Modules (for parallel tracks) Pallet Coding(Section 9) is typically required to identify pallets inconjunction with Gating Systems
Overview
Magazine Spur (Middle)With Manual Workstation
Parallel Spur (Right)Reverse Loop
In-Line Bridge Track
Table Module
Corner Module
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-2
Magazine Gating
Magazine Middle Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between its Linear Tracks to the mainloop (ie there is no separation between the In amp Out Gates alongthe main loop track) A 180deg Corner Module (Section 4) fitsperfectly on the opposite end of the Magazine Magazines aretypically used for manual workstations (See page 1-3) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2) queuesensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
Magazine Middle Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Middle GateGate-Only
Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-3
Magazine Gating
Magazine Left Gates connect Magazines that have the minimumdistance possible between their Linear Tracks directly to thecorners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of theMagazine By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine thepallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite sideaccess andor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Left Gates include(1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine Left Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel DirectionPallet Travel
Direction
Magazine Left Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-4
Magazine Right Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between their Linear Tracks directly tothe corners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of whateverlength Double Track Module is used for the Spur By swappingthe In amp Out Gates on the Spur the pallet orientation can berotated (reverse loop) for opposite side access andor to performcyclic repetitions on the Spur stationsMagazine Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine GatingMagazine Right Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Right Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-5
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Middle Gates link Parallel Tracks to the transport loop atthe minimum distance allowed between the Parallel and transportloop tracks (ie there is no separation between the In-Gate andthe Corner to the Linear Track) Parallel tracks can be any length(See page 1-3 for various ways to use Parallel Tracks) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Parallel Track the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsParallel Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel Middle Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Middle Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-6
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Left Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the left cornerof the transport loop (to save space) at the minimum distanceallowed between the Parallel and transport loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesNOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module is included withreversing loopFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Left Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Left Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-7
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Right Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the rightcorner of the transport loop (to save space) at the minimumdistance allowed between the Parallel and loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestationsParallel Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3)queue sensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree CornerModules NOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module isincluded with reversing loop
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Right Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Right Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-8
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel End Gates link Parallel Tracks to the end of the transportloop (to save space) at the minimum distance allowed between theParallel and transport loop tracks Non-reversing Parallel Tracksare as wide as the transport loop (See page 1-3 for various waysto use Parallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on theParallel Track the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop)for opposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel End Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queue sensorsfor traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner Modules TheReverse Loop version includes (2) additional Corner Modules
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel End Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-9
Bridge Tracks can be In-Line (for bypassing operations on a loop)and Off-Line (for building custom Spur Tracks) In-Line BridgeGates connect Bridge Tracks to opposite sides of a transport loopBy swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Bridge Tracks the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsBridge Tracks Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic controlFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gates link custom-sized Spurs anywherealong a Linear Track Module and include (1) pneumaticallyoperated switching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) palletstops and (3) queue sensors for traffic control Custom Spurshave variable separation between the In amp Out Gates therefore anadditional Pallet Stop is included for staging pallet(s) betweenthem This minimizes pallet transfer time through the Bridge
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Modules (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Bridge Track GatingIn-Line Bridge Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
In-Line Bridge Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleForward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-10
Off-Line Bridge Right Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the rightcorner of a transport loop An additional Pallet Stop is included forstaging pallet(s) between the In amp Out Gates This minimizespallet transfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp OutGates on a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverseloop) for access or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Off-Line Bridge Left Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the leftcorner of a transport loop Custom Spurs have variable separationbetween the In amp Out Gates therefore an additional Pallet Stop isincluded for staging pallet(s) between them This minimizes pallettransfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp Out Gateson a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foraccess or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specify
bull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Bridge Track GatingOff-Line Bridge Left Gate
Off-Line Bridge Right Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate Left Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate LeftReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate Right Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate RightReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-1
Track Mounted Pallet Stops
Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
The Track Mounted Pallet Stop mounts directly to the trackprofile and includes an actuated pawl lever that preciselystops the Pallet guide pins Rails secure the pallet position inthe lateral direction An inductive sensor embedded in the railsupport verifies that the pallet pin is in position This allowsstopping on multiple pallet pins or indexing through a stationAn anti-reversing latching pawl can be added to preventupstream-applied loads from moving the pallet backwards inthe stop (see Accessories)
Pallet Stops with Long Guide Rails are used in applicationswhere the spacing between any two pallet posts is 150 mm orless Pallet Stops with Short Guide Rails are used primarilyfor pallet traffic control at gates or anywhere queuing ofpallets needs to be controlled Stops with Short Guide Railsmay also be used to position longer pallets in an automaticstation when the spacing between any two posts is greaterthan 150 mm together with a Supplemental Guide
HD Pallet Stops have a larger release cylinder and arespecified when there is a high back pressure load on the stopBack pressure is a function of pallet weight number of palletsin queue and conveyor belt speed Choose an HD PalletStop when the back pressure load exceeds 180 N
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering InformationIO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HD Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
HD Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Supplemental Guide
AAA-S22-41800 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-41900 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42000 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-42100 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-42200 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42300 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43200 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43300 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43400 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43500 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43600 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43700 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AFH-A22-00623 Supplemental Guide 200 wide
AFH-A22-00633 Supplemental Guide 250 wide
AFH-A22-00643 Supplemental Guide 300 wide
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-3
Dimensions
Double Track ModuleFloor MountedDouble Track Modules are conveyor sections typically usedto create custom length Compact Loops or Spur TrackModules They can also be combined with Single TracksCorners (90 amp 180 Degree) and Manual Workstations formanual assembly operations (Section 8)
Double Track Modules come complete with Floor Mountsall Conveyor Belts connection brackets and Two (2) DrivesThe two drives can be configured to run in the same oropposite directions
Standard system dimensions are shown here Customlengths available on request
Standard speed 240 mms Other speeds are availableStandard voltage 208 V 60 Hz
Ordering Information
B+10
L
X 100
Module WidthX (mm)
Pallet Width B
200 250 300
Double Track 520 620 720
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-4
StandsNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately
Table MountAll Standard Table Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) when used with Table Modules shown inSection 7 Custom line heights are specified in the part number asshown below in millimeters Line Height is the distance from the floor to the top of the transfer system belt
Floor Mount BasicAll Standard Floor Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) Custom line heights are specified in thepart number as shown below in millimeters
Floor Mount Spur Tracks Double Tracks amp Manual WorkstationAll Standard Floor Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) Custom line heights are specified in thepart number as shown below in millimeters
Intermediate Element without StandIncluded with Standard Track Section Modules For attachment of any of the above Stands to transporttracks where no Intermediate Element is present Specify Part Number based on Track Section width
System WidthB (mm) Part Number Description
200 AFH-A21-01656 Intermediate Element 200
250 AFH-A21-01657 Intermediate Element 250
300 AFH-A21-01658 Intermediate Element 300
H2 H
1
885
X
1000
H2 = 140 mm
H2 = 265 mm
1000
885
Module WidthX (mm)
Pallet Width B
200 250 300
Single Track 520 520 520
Double Track 530 630 730
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-5
DrivesNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately
Standard Track Section Drive Units fall into two categories
Dual Belt w Constant SpeedFor typical track operation Standard belt speed is 250mmsecOther speeds are available
Single Belt w Constant SpeedFor situations in which a track section with a single belt isrequired whether as a dual rail track or single rail(ie Feeder Belts)
The drive unit for Standard Corner Modules is specified below It isused to drive a single belt with constant speed (418 mmsec) andcan also be used to drive Feeder Belts
Drives for Corner Modules (where additional units are needed)
Drives for Track (where additional units are needed)
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-92200 Drive Dual ndash 200 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-92300 Drive Dual ndash 250 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-92400 Drive Dual ndash 300 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93100 Drive Dual ndash 200 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-93200 Drive Dual ndash 250 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-93300 Drive Dual ndash 300 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-92500 Drive Single ndash 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93700 Drive Single ndash 400 VAC 50 Hz
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-92000 Drive Corner ndash 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93300 Drive Corner ndash 400 VAC 50 Hz
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-6
Conveyor BeltsNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately or when combining any Track Modules with Spur Tracks Bridge Tracks or Lift Gates
Ordering Information
Transport track without belt deflecting rollers
LT = 2 x L + 450 mm
Transport track with single pair of belt deflecting rollers at entry exit to Bridge Track
LT = 2 x L + 450 mmBelt lengths up to 25 mm longer can be accommodatedby adjusting a pulley in the drive unit
Transport track with two pair of belt deflecting rollers at entry exit to Spur Tracks
LT = 2 x L + 500 mm
Example
Transport Track Length = 10 m
LT = 2 x L + 450 mmLT = 2 x 1000 + 450 mmLT = 2450 mm
rArrPart No ARR-112-22450
Lanco belts are pre-made and labeled with Part Numberand Belt Length for ease of identification The belt feeddirection is also marked with an arrowStandard Belt Material is highly conductive SieglingExtremultus TT 51-6431-HC Black Polyamide fabricjacket and polyamide foil tension member Other beltmaterials are available for special applications
Combination of multiple transport tracks
It is possible to bridge over multiple transport tracks witha single conveyor belt saving drives This also occurswhen using a Lift Gate Track Module (Page 3-3)
The maximum combined transport track length is 3200 mm
How to order conveyor belts1 Calculate conveyor belt length
2 Specify Part No
L
L
L
HFL 2002-S Corners 4-1
Corner Modules are are typically connected to any Single orDouble Track Module and used to change the pallet directionby 90 or 180 degrees They can be used to form CompactLoops combined with Gate Modules (Chapter 5) to createcustom Spur Tracks or configured with Linear Tracks tomake serpentine or any shape systems
Corner Modules mount to each of the adjacent modules andinclude a belt drive unit angled at 45 degrees to quickly andefficiently transfer a pallet through the turn
Standard speed 418 mmsStandard voltage 208 V 60 Hz
Ordering Information
Corner Module
90ordm Corner Module 180ordm Corner Module
IO Requirements90 Deg Corner 1 Motor180 Deg Corner 2 Motors
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-1
Gating Systems
Gating Systems are an important part of the HFL 2002-STransfer System They allow pallets to be diverted from themain transport loop onto Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
This Section offers the Gating System mechanisms that areused to divert pallets into Spurs or Bridge Tracks Commonexamples of Gating Systems are shown To better clarifyhow these Gates are used it is important to understand thedefinition of Spur Tracks and Bridge Tracks
There are two types of Spur Tracks Magazines with workarea perpendicular to the main loop and Parallel Trackswith work area parallel to the main loop Both can be usedfor manual or automatic workstations By swapping In amp OutGates of a Spur Track a batch-processing cell can becreated that allows cyclic repetitions at the stations Thisalso reverses pallet orientation for access from the oppositeside Note that Spur Tracks can be placed directly on thecorners of a transport loop which helps save floor space
There are two types of Bridge Tracks In-Line Tracksused to bypass operations on a transport loop and Off-LineTracks used to create custom Spur Tracks
Gating Systems mount to Linear Track Modules (Section 3)and include switching gates pallet stops queue sensorsand Corner Modules (for parallel tracks) Pallet Coding(Section 9) is typically required to identify pallets inconjunction with Gating Systems
Overview
Magazine Spur (Middle)With Manual Workstation
Parallel Spur (Right)Reverse Loop
In-Line Bridge Track
Table Module
Corner Module
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-2
Magazine Gating
Magazine Middle Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between its Linear Tracks to the mainloop (ie there is no separation between the In amp Out Gates alongthe main loop track) A 180deg Corner Module (Section 4) fitsperfectly on the opposite end of the Magazine Magazines aretypically used for manual workstations (See page 1-3) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2) queuesensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
Magazine Middle Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Middle GateGate-Only
Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-3
Magazine Gating
Magazine Left Gates connect Magazines that have the minimumdistance possible between their Linear Tracks directly to thecorners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of theMagazine By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine thepallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite sideaccess andor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Left Gates include(1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine Left Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel DirectionPallet Travel
Direction
Magazine Left Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-4
Magazine Right Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between their Linear Tracks directly tothe corners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of whateverlength Double Track Module is used for the Spur By swappingthe In amp Out Gates on the Spur the pallet orientation can berotated (reverse loop) for opposite side access andor to performcyclic repetitions on the Spur stationsMagazine Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine GatingMagazine Right Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Right Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-5
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Middle Gates link Parallel Tracks to the transport loop atthe minimum distance allowed between the Parallel and transportloop tracks (ie there is no separation between the In-Gate andthe Corner to the Linear Track) Parallel tracks can be any length(See page 1-3 for various ways to use Parallel Tracks) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Parallel Track the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsParallel Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel Middle Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Middle Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-6
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Left Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the left cornerof the transport loop (to save space) at the minimum distanceallowed between the Parallel and transport loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesNOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module is included withreversing loopFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Left Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Left Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-7
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Right Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the rightcorner of the transport loop (to save space) at the minimumdistance allowed between the Parallel and loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestationsParallel Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3)queue sensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree CornerModules NOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module isincluded with reversing loop
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Right Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Right Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-8
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel End Gates link Parallel Tracks to the end of the transportloop (to save space) at the minimum distance allowed between theParallel and transport loop tracks Non-reversing Parallel Tracksare as wide as the transport loop (See page 1-3 for various waysto use Parallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on theParallel Track the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop)for opposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel End Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queue sensorsfor traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner Modules TheReverse Loop version includes (2) additional Corner Modules
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel End Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-9
Bridge Tracks can be In-Line (for bypassing operations on a loop)and Off-Line (for building custom Spur Tracks) In-Line BridgeGates connect Bridge Tracks to opposite sides of a transport loopBy swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Bridge Tracks the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsBridge Tracks Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic controlFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gates link custom-sized Spurs anywherealong a Linear Track Module and include (1) pneumaticallyoperated switching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) palletstops and (3) queue sensors for traffic control Custom Spurshave variable separation between the In amp Out Gates therefore anadditional Pallet Stop is included for staging pallet(s) betweenthem This minimizes pallet transfer time through the Bridge
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Modules (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Bridge Track GatingIn-Line Bridge Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
In-Line Bridge Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleForward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-10
Off-Line Bridge Right Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the rightcorner of a transport loop An additional Pallet Stop is included forstaging pallet(s) between the In amp Out Gates This minimizespallet transfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp OutGates on a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverseloop) for access or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Off-Line Bridge Left Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the leftcorner of a transport loop Custom Spurs have variable separationbetween the In amp Out Gates therefore an additional Pallet Stop isincluded for staging pallet(s) between them This minimizes pallettransfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp Out Gateson a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foraccess or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specify
bull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Bridge Track GatingOff-Line Bridge Left Gate
Off-Line Bridge Right Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate Left Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate LeftReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate Right Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate RightReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-1
Track Mounted Pallet Stops
Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
The Track Mounted Pallet Stop mounts directly to the trackprofile and includes an actuated pawl lever that preciselystops the Pallet guide pins Rails secure the pallet position inthe lateral direction An inductive sensor embedded in the railsupport verifies that the pallet pin is in position This allowsstopping on multiple pallet pins or indexing through a stationAn anti-reversing latching pawl can be added to preventupstream-applied loads from moving the pallet backwards inthe stop (see Accessories)
Pallet Stops with Long Guide Rails are used in applicationswhere the spacing between any two pallet posts is 150 mm orless Pallet Stops with Short Guide Rails are used primarilyfor pallet traffic control at gates or anywhere queuing ofpallets needs to be controlled Stops with Short Guide Railsmay also be used to position longer pallets in an automaticstation when the spacing between any two posts is greaterthan 150 mm together with a Supplemental Guide
HD Pallet Stops have a larger release cylinder and arespecified when there is a high back pressure load on the stopBack pressure is a function of pallet weight number of palletsin queue and conveyor belt speed Choose an HD PalletStop when the back pressure load exceeds 180 N
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering InformationIO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HD Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
HD Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Supplemental Guide
AAA-S22-41800 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-41900 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42000 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-42100 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-42200 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42300 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43200 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43300 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43400 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43500 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43600 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43700 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AFH-A22-00623 Supplemental Guide 200 wide
AFH-A22-00633 Supplemental Guide 250 wide
AFH-A22-00643 Supplemental Guide 300 wide
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-4
StandsNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately
Table MountAll Standard Table Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) when used with Table Modules shown inSection 7 Custom line heights are specified in the part number asshown below in millimeters Line Height is the distance from the floor to the top of the transfer system belt
Floor Mount BasicAll Standard Floor Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) Custom line heights are specified in thepart number as shown below in millimeters
Floor Mount Spur Tracks Double Tracks amp Manual WorkstationAll Standard Floor Mount Stands correspond to a system line heightof 1000 mm (+- 30 mm) Custom line heights are specified in thepart number as shown below in millimeters
Intermediate Element without StandIncluded with Standard Track Section Modules For attachment of any of the above Stands to transporttracks where no Intermediate Element is present Specify Part Number based on Track Section width
System WidthB (mm) Part Number Description
200 AFH-A21-01656 Intermediate Element 200
250 AFH-A21-01657 Intermediate Element 250
300 AFH-A21-01658 Intermediate Element 300
H2 H
1
885
X
1000
H2 = 140 mm
H2 = 265 mm
1000
885
Module WidthX (mm)
Pallet Width B
200 250 300
Single Track 520 520 520
Double Track 530 630 730
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-5
DrivesNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately
Standard Track Section Drive Units fall into two categories
Dual Belt w Constant SpeedFor typical track operation Standard belt speed is 250mmsecOther speeds are available
Single Belt w Constant SpeedFor situations in which a track section with a single belt isrequired whether as a dual rail track or single rail(ie Feeder Belts)
The drive unit for Standard Corner Modules is specified below It isused to drive a single belt with constant speed (418 mmsec) andcan also be used to drive Feeder Belts
Drives for Corner Modules (where additional units are needed)
Drives for Track (where additional units are needed)
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-92200 Drive Dual ndash 200 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-92300 Drive Dual ndash 250 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-92400 Drive Dual ndash 300 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93100 Drive Dual ndash 200 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-93200 Drive Dual ndash 250 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-93300 Drive Dual ndash 300 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-92500 Drive Single ndash 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93700 Drive Single ndash 400 VAC 50 Hz
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-92000 Drive Corner ndash 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93300 Drive Corner ndash 400 VAC 50 Hz
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-6
Conveyor BeltsNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately or when combining any Track Modules with Spur Tracks Bridge Tracks or Lift Gates
Ordering Information
Transport track without belt deflecting rollers
LT = 2 x L + 450 mm
Transport track with single pair of belt deflecting rollers at entry exit to Bridge Track
LT = 2 x L + 450 mmBelt lengths up to 25 mm longer can be accommodatedby adjusting a pulley in the drive unit
Transport track with two pair of belt deflecting rollers at entry exit to Spur Tracks
LT = 2 x L + 500 mm
Example
Transport Track Length = 10 m
LT = 2 x L + 450 mmLT = 2 x 1000 + 450 mmLT = 2450 mm
rArrPart No ARR-112-22450
Lanco belts are pre-made and labeled with Part Numberand Belt Length for ease of identification The belt feeddirection is also marked with an arrowStandard Belt Material is highly conductive SieglingExtremultus TT 51-6431-HC Black Polyamide fabricjacket and polyamide foil tension member Other beltmaterials are available for special applications
Combination of multiple transport tracks
It is possible to bridge over multiple transport tracks witha single conveyor belt saving drives This also occurswhen using a Lift Gate Track Module (Page 3-3)
The maximum combined transport track length is 3200 mm
How to order conveyor belts1 Calculate conveyor belt length
2 Specify Part No
L
L
L
HFL 2002-S Corners 4-1
Corner Modules are are typically connected to any Single orDouble Track Module and used to change the pallet directionby 90 or 180 degrees They can be used to form CompactLoops combined with Gate Modules (Chapter 5) to createcustom Spur Tracks or configured with Linear Tracks tomake serpentine or any shape systems
Corner Modules mount to each of the adjacent modules andinclude a belt drive unit angled at 45 degrees to quickly andefficiently transfer a pallet through the turn
Standard speed 418 mmsStandard voltage 208 V 60 Hz
Ordering Information
Corner Module
90ordm Corner Module 180ordm Corner Module
IO Requirements90 Deg Corner 1 Motor180 Deg Corner 2 Motors
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-1
Gating Systems
Gating Systems are an important part of the HFL 2002-STransfer System They allow pallets to be diverted from themain transport loop onto Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
This Section offers the Gating System mechanisms that areused to divert pallets into Spurs or Bridge Tracks Commonexamples of Gating Systems are shown To better clarifyhow these Gates are used it is important to understand thedefinition of Spur Tracks and Bridge Tracks
There are two types of Spur Tracks Magazines with workarea perpendicular to the main loop and Parallel Trackswith work area parallel to the main loop Both can be usedfor manual or automatic workstations By swapping In amp OutGates of a Spur Track a batch-processing cell can becreated that allows cyclic repetitions at the stations Thisalso reverses pallet orientation for access from the oppositeside Note that Spur Tracks can be placed directly on thecorners of a transport loop which helps save floor space
There are two types of Bridge Tracks In-Line Tracksused to bypass operations on a transport loop and Off-LineTracks used to create custom Spur Tracks
Gating Systems mount to Linear Track Modules (Section 3)and include switching gates pallet stops queue sensorsand Corner Modules (for parallel tracks) Pallet Coding(Section 9) is typically required to identify pallets inconjunction with Gating Systems
Overview
Magazine Spur (Middle)With Manual Workstation
Parallel Spur (Right)Reverse Loop
In-Line Bridge Track
Table Module
Corner Module
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-2
Magazine Gating
Magazine Middle Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between its Linear Tracks to the mainloop (ie there is no separation between the In amp Out Gates alongthe main loop track) A 180deg Corner Module (Section 4) fitsperfectly on the opposite end of the Magazine Magazines aretypically used for manual workstations (See page 1-3) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2) queuesensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
Magazine Middle Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Middle GateGate-Only
Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-3
Magazine Gating
Magazine Left Gates connect Magazines that have the minimumdistance possible between their Linear Tracks directly to thecorners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of theMagazine By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine thepallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite sideaccess andor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Left Gates include(1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine Left Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel DirectionPallet Travel
Direction
Magazine Left Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-4
Magazine Right Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between their Linear Tracks directly tothe corners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of whateverlength Double Track Module is used for the Spur By swappingthe In amp Out Gates on the Spur the pallet orientation can berotated (reverse loop) for opposite side access andor to performcyclic repetitions on the Spur stationsMagazine Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine GatingMagazine Right Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Right Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-5
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Middle Gates link Parallel Tracks to the transport loop atthe minimum distance allowed between the Parallel and transportloop tracks (ie there is no separation between the In-Gate andthe Corner to the Linear Track) Parallel tracks can be any length(See page 1-3 for various ways to use Parallel Tracks) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Parallel Track the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsParallel Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel Middle Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Middle Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-6
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Left Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the left cornerof the transport loop (to save space) at the minimum distanceallowed between the Parallel and transport loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesNOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module is included withreversing loopFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Left Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Left Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-7
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Right Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the rightcorner of the transport loop (to save space) at the minimumdistance allowed between the Parallel and loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestationsParallel Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3)queue sensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree CornerModules NOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module isincluded with reversing loop
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Right Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Right Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-8
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel End Gates link Parallel Tracks to the end of the transportloop (to save space) at the minimum distance allowed between theParallel and transport loop tracks Non-reversing Parallel Tracksare as wide as the transport loop (See page 1-3 for various waysto use Parallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on theParallel Track the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop)for opposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel End Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queue sensorsfor traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner Modules TheReverse Loop version includes (2) additional Corner Modules
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel End Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-9
Bridge Tracks can be In-Line (for bypassing operations on a loop)and Off-Line (for building custom Spur Tracks) In-Line BridgeGates connect Bridge Tracks to opposite sides of a transport loopBy swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Bridge Tracks the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsBridge Tracks Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic controlFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gates link custom-sized Spurs anywherealong a Linear Track Module and include (1) pneumaticallyoperated switching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) palletstops and (3) queue sensors for traffic control Custom Spurshave variable separation between the In amp Out Gates therefore anadditional Pallet Stop is included for staging pallet(s) betweenthem This minimizes pallet transfer time through the Bridge
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Modules (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Bridge Track GatingIn-Line Bridge Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
In-Line Bridge Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleForward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-10
Off-Line Bridge Right Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the rightcorner of a transport loop An additional Pallet Stop is included forstaging pallet(s) between the In amp Out Gates This minimizespallet transfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp OutGates on a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverseloop) for access or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Off-Line Bridge Left Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the leftcorner of a transport loop Custom Spurs have variable separationbetween the In amp Out Gates therefore an additional Pallet Stop isincluded for staging pallet(s) between them This minimizes pallettransfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp Out Gateson a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foraccess or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specify
bull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Bridge Track GatingOff-Line Bridge Left Gate
Off-Line Bridge Right Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate Left Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate LeftReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate Right Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate RightReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-1
Track Mounted Pallet Stops
Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
The Track Mounted Pallet Stop mounts directly to the trackprofile and includes an actuated pawl lever that preciselystops the Pallet guide pins Rails secure the pallet position inthe lateral direction An inductive sensor embedded in the railsupport verifies that the pallet pin is in position This allowsstopping on multiple pallet pins or indexing through a stationAn anti-reversing latching pawl can be added to preventupstream-applied loads from moving the pallet backwards inthe stop (see Accessories)
Pallet Stops with Long Guide Rails are used in applicationswhere the spacing between any two pallet posts is 150 mm orless Pallet Stops with Short Guide Rails are used primarilyfor pallet traffic control at gates or anywhere queuing ofpallets needs to be controlled Stops with Short Guide Railsmay also be used to position longer pallets in an automaticstation when the spacing between any two posts is greaterthan 150 mm together with a Supplemental Guide
HD Pallet Stops have a larger release cylinder and arespecified when there is a high back pressure load on the stopBack pressure is a function of pallet weight number of palletsin queue and conveyor belt speed Choose an HD PalletStop when the back pressure load exceeds 180 N
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering InformationIO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HD Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
HD Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Supplemental Guide
AAA-S22-41800 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-41900 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42000 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-42100 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-42200 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42300 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43200 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43300 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43400 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43500 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43600 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43700 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AFH-A22-00623 Supplemental Guide 200 wide
AFH-A22-00633 Supplemental Guide 250 wide
AFH-A22-00643 Supplemental Guide 300 wide
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-5
DrivesNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately
Standard Track Section Drive Units fall into two categories
Dual Belt w Constant SpeedFor typical track operation Standard belt speed is 250mmsecOther speeds are available
Single Belt w Constant SpeedFor situations in which a track section with a single belt isrequired whether as a dual rail track or single rail(ie Feeder Belts)
The drive unit for Standard Corner Modules is specified below It isused to drive a single belt with constant speed (418 mmsec) andcan also be used to drive Feeder Belts
Drives for Corner Modules (where additional units are needed)
Drives for Track (where additional units are needed)
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-92200 Drive Dual ndash 200 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-92300 Drive Dual ndash 250 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-92400 Drive Dual ndash 300 mm Wide 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93100 Drive Dual ndash 200 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-93200 Drive Dual ndash 250 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-93300 Drive Dual ndash 300 mm Wide 400 VAC 50 Hz
AAA-S22-92500 Drive Single ndash 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93700 Drive Single ndash 400 VAC 50 Hz
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-92000 Drive Corner ndash 208 VAC 60 Hz
AAA-S22-93300 Drive Corner ndash 400 VAC 50 Hz
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-6
Conveyor BeltsNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately or when combining any Track Modules with Spur Tracks Bridge Tracks or Lift Gates
Ordering Information
Transport track without belt deflecting rollers
LT = 2 x L + 450 mm
Transport track with single pair of belt deflecting rollers at entry exit to Bridge Track
LT = 2 x L + 450 mmBelt lengths up to 25 mm longer can be accommodatedby adjusting a pulley in the drive unit
Transport track with two pair of belt deflecting rollers at entry exit to Spur Tracks
LT = 2 x L + 500 mm
Example
Transport Track Length = 10 m
LT = 2 x L + 450 mmLT = 2 x 1000 + 450 mmLT = 2450 mm
rArrPart No ARR-112-22450
Lanco belts are pre-made and labeled with Part Numberand Belt Length for ease of identification The belt feeddirection is also marked with an arrowStandard Belt Material is highly conductive SieglingExtremultus TT 51-6431-HC Black Polyamide fabricjacket and polyamide foil tension member Other beltmaterials are available for special applications
Combination of multiple transport tracks
It is possible to bridge over multiple transport tracks witha single conveyor belt saving drives This also occurswhen using a Lift Gate Track Module (Page 3-3)
The maximum combined transport track length is 3200 mm
How to order conveyor belts1 Calculate conveyor belt length
2 Specify Part No
L
L
L
HFL 2002-S Corners 4-1
Corner Modules are are typically connected to any Single orDouble Track Module and used to change the pallet directionby 90 or 180 degrees They can be used to form CompactLoops combined with Gate Modules (Chapter 5) to createcustom Spur Tracks or configured with Linear Tracks tomake serpentine or any shape systems
Corner Modules mount to each of the adjacent modules andinclude a belt drive unit angled at 45 degrees to quickly andefficiently transfer a pallet through the turn
Standard speed 418 mmsStandard voltage 208 V 60 Hz
Ordering Information
Corner Module
90ordm Corner Module 180ordm Corner Module
IO Requirements90 Deg Corner 1 Motor180 Deg Corner 2 Motors
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-1
Gating Systems
Gating Systems are an important part of the HFL 2002-STransfer System They allow pallets to be diverted from themain transport loop onto Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
This Section offers the Gating System mechanisms that areused to divert pallets into Spurs or Bridge Tracks Commonexamples of Gating Systems are shown To better clarifyhow these Gates are used it is important to understand thedefinition of Spur Tracks and Bridge Tracks
There are two types of Spur Tracks Magazines with workarea perpendicular to the main loop and Parallel Trackswith work area parallel to the main loop Both can be usedfor manual or automatic workstations By swapping In amp OutGates of a Spur Track a batch-processing cell can becreated that allows cyclic repetitions at the stations Thisalso reverses pallet orientation for access from the oppositeside Note that Spur Tracks can be placed directly on thecorners of a transport loop which helps save floor space
There are two types of Bridge Tracks In-Line Tracksused to bypass operations on a transport loop and Off-LineTracks used to create custom Spur Tracks
Gating Systems mount to Linear Track Modules (Section 3)and include switching gates pallet stops queue sensorsand Corner Modules (for parallel tracks) Pallet Coding(Section 9) is typically required to identify pallets inconjunction with Gating Systems
Overview
Magazine Spur (Middle)With Manual Workstation
Parallel Spur (Right)Reverse Loop
In-Line Bridge Track
Table Module
Corner Module
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-2
Magazine Gating
Magazine Middle Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between its Linear Tracks to the mainloop (ie there is no separation between the In amp Out Gates alongthe main loop track) A 180deg Corner Module (Section 4) fitsperfectly on the opposite end of the Magazine Magazines aretypically used for manual workstations (See page 1-3) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2) queuesensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
Magazine Middle Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Middle GateGate-Only
Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-3
Magazine Gating
Magazine Left Gates connect Magazines that have the minimumdistance possible between their Linear Tracks directly to thecorners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of theMagazine By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine thepallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite sideaccess andor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Left Gates include(1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine Left Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel DirectionPallet Travel
Direction
Magazine Left Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-4
Magazine Right Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between their Linear Tracks directly tothe corners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of whateverlength Double Track Module is used for the Spur By swappingthe In amp Out Gates on the Spur the pallet orientation can berotated (reverse loop) for opposite side access andor to performcyclic repetitions on the Spur stationsMagazine Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine GatingMagazine Right Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Right Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-5
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Middle Gates link Parallel Tracks to the transport loop atthe minimum distance allowed between the Parallel and transportloop tracks (ie there is no separation between the In-Gate andthe Corner to the Linear Track) Parallel tracks can be any length(See page 1-3 for various ways to use Parallel Tracks) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Parallel Track the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsParallel Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel Middle Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Middle Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-6
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Left Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the left cornerof the transport loop (to save space) at the minimum distanceallowed between the Parallel and transport loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesNOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module is included withreversing loopFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Left Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Left Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-7
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Right Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the rightcorner of the transport loop (to save space) at the minimumdistance allowed between the Parallel and loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestationsParallel Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3)queue sensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree CornerModules NOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module isincluded with reversing loop
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Right Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Right Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-8
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel End Gates link Parallel Tracks to the end of the transportloop (to save space) at the minimum distance allowed between theParallel and transport loop tracks Non-reversing Parallel Tracksare as wide as the transport loop (See page 1-3 for various waysto use Parallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on theParallel Track the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop)for opposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel End Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queue sensorsfor traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner Modules TheReverse Loop version includes (2) additional Corner Modules
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel End Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-9
Bridge Tracks can be In-Line (for bypassing operations on a loop)and Off-Line (for building custom Spur Tracks) In-Line BridgeGates connect Bridge Tracks to opposite sides of a transport loopBy swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Bridge Tracks the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsBridge Tracks Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic controlFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gates link custom-sized Spurs anywherealong a Linear Track Module and include (1) pneumaticallyoperated switching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) palletstops and (3) queue sensors for traffic control Custom Spurshave variable separation between the In amp Out Gates therefore anadditional Pallet Stop is included for staging pallet(s) betweenthem This minimizes pallet transfer time through the Bridge
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Modules (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Bridge Track GatingIn-Line Bridge Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
In-Line Bridge Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleForward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-10
Off-Line Bridge Right Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the rightcorner of a transport loop An additional Pallet Stop is included forstaging pallet(s) between the In amp Out Gates This minimizespallet transfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp OutGates on a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverseloop) for access or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Off-Line Bridge Left Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the leftcorner of a transport loop Custom Spurs have variable separationbetween the In amp Out Gates therefore an additional Pallet Stop isincluded for staging pallet(s) between them This minimizes pallettransfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp Out Gateson a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foraccess or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specify
bull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Bridge Track GatingOff-Line Bridge Left Gate
Off-Line Bridge Right Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate Left Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate LeftReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate Right Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate RightReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-1
Track Mounted Pallet Stops
Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
The Track Mounted Pallet Stop mounts directly to the trackprofile and includes an actuated pawl lever that preciselystops the Pallet guide pins Rails secure the pallet position inthe lateral direction An inductive sensor embedded in the railsupport verifies that the pallet pin is in position This allowsstopping on multiple pallet pins or indexing through a stationAn anti-reversing latching pawl can be added to preventupstream-applied loads from moving the pallet backwards inthe stop (see Accessories)
Pallet Stops with Long Guide Rails are used in applicationswhere the spacing between any two pallet posts is 150 mm orless Pallet Stops with Short Guide Rails are used primarilyfor pallet traffic control at gates or anywhere queuing ofpallets needs to be controlled Stops with Short Guide Railsmay also be used to position longer pallets in an automaticstation when the spacing between any two posts is greaterthan 150 mm together with a Supplemental Guide
HD Pallet Stops have a larger release cylinder and arespecified when there is a high back pressure load on the stopBack pressure is a function of pallet weight number of palletsin queue and conveyor belt speed Choose an HD PalletStop when the back pressure load exceeds 180 N
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering InformationIO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HD Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
HD Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Supplemental Guide
AAA-S22-41800 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-41900 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42000 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-42100 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-42200 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42300 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43200 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43300 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43400 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43500 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43600 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43700 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AFH-A22-00623 Supplemental Guide 200 wide
AFH-A22-00633 Supplemental Guide 250 wide
AFH-A22-00643 Supplemental Guide 300 wide
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Linear Tracks 3-6
Conveyor BeltsNote Included with Standard Track Modules Shown here for ordering separately or when combining any Track Modules with Spur Tracks Bridge Tracks or Lift Gates
Ordering Information
Transport track without belt deflecting rollers
LT = 2 x L + 450 mm
Transport track with single pair of belt deflecting rollers at entry exit to Bridge Track
LT = 2 x L + 450 mmBelt lengths up to 25 mm longer can be accommodatedby adjusting a pulley in the drive unit
Transport track with two pair of belt deflecting rollers at entry exit to Spur Tracks
LT = 2 x L + 500 mm
Example
Transport Track Length = 10 m
LT = 2 x L + 450 mmLT = 2 x 1000 + 450 mmLT = 2450 mm
rArrPart No ARR-112-22450
Lanco belts are pre-made and labeled with Part Numberand Belt Length for ease of identification The belt feeddirection is also marked with an arrowStandard Belt Material is highly conductive SieglingExtremultus TT 51-6431-HC Black Polyamide fabricjacket and polyamide foil tension member Other beltmaterials are available for special applications
Combination of multiple transport tracks
It is possible to bridge over multiple transport tracks witha single conveyor belt saving drives This also occurswhen using a Lift Gate Track Module (Page 3-3)
The maximum combined transport track length is 3200 mm
How to order conveyor belts1 Calculate conveyor belt length
2 Specify Part No
L
L
L
HFL 2002-S Corners 4-1
Corner Modules are are typically connected to any Single orDouble Track Module and used to change the pallet directionby 90 or 180 degrees They can be used to form CompactLoops combined with Gate Modules (Chapter 5) to createcustom Spur Tracks or configured with Linear Tracks tomake serpentine or any shape systems
Corner Modules mount to each of the adjacent modules andinclude a belt drive unit angled at 45 degrees to quickly andefficiently transfer a pallet through the turn
Standard speed 418 mmsStandard voltage 208 V 60 Hz
Ordering Information
Corner Module
90ordm Corner Module 180ordm Corner Module
IO Requirements90 Deg Corner 1 Motor180 Deg Corner 2 Motors
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-1
Gating Systems
Gating Systems are an important part of the HFL 2002-STransfer System They allow pallets to be diverted from themain transport loop onto Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
This Section offers the Gating System mechanisms that areused to divert pallets into Spurs or Bridge Tracks Commonexamples of Gating Systems are shown To better clarifyhow these Gates are used it is important to understand thedefinition of Spur Tracks and Bridge Tracks
There are two types of Spur Tracks Magazines with workarea perpendicular to the main loop and Parallel Trackswith work area parallel to the main loop Both can be usedfor manual or automatic workstations By swapping In amp OutGates of a Spur Track a batch-processing cell can becreated that allows cyclic repetitions at the stations Thisalso reverses pallet orientation for access from the oppositeside Note that Spur Tracks can be placed directly on thecorners of a transport loop which helps save floor space
There are two types of Bridge Tracks In-Line Tracksused to bypass operations on a transport loop and Off-LineTracks used to create custom Spur Tracks
Gating Systems mount to Linear Track Modules (Section 3)and include switching gates pallet stops queue sensorsand Corner Modules (for parallel tracks) Pallet Coding(Section 9) is typically required to identify pallets inconjunction with Gating Systems
Overview
Magazine Spur (Middle)With Manual Workstation
Parallel Spur (Right)Reverse Loop
In-Line Bridge Track
Table Module
Corner Module
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-2
Magazine Gating
Magazine Middle Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between its Linear Tracks to the mainloop (ie there is no separation between the In amp Out Gates alongthe main loop track) A 180deg Corner Module (Section 4) fitsperfectly on the opposite end of the Magazine Magazines aretypically used for manual workstations (See page 1-3) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2) queuesensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
Magazine Middle Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Middle GateGate-Only
Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-3
Magazine Gating
Magazine Left Gates connect Magazines that have the minimumdistance possible between their Linear Tracks directly to thecorners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of theMagazine By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine thepallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite sideaccess andor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Left Gates include(1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine Left Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel DirectionPallet Travel
Direction
Magazine Left Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-4
Magazine Right Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between their Linear Tracks directly tothe corners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of whateverlength Double Track Module is used for the Spur By swappingthe In amp Out Gates on the Spur the pallet orientation can berotated (reverse loop) for opposite side access andor to performcyclic repetitions on the Spur stationsMagazine Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine GatingMagazine Right Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Right Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-5
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Middle Gates link Parallel Tracks to the transport loop atthe minimum distance allowed between the Parallel and transportloop tracks (ie there is no separation between the In-Gate andthe Corner to the Linear Track) Parallel tracks can be any length(See page 1-3 for various ways to use Parallel Tracks) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Parallel Track the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsParallel Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel Middle Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Middle Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-6
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Left Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the left cornerof the transport loop (to save space) at the minimum distanceallowed between the Parallel and transport loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesNOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module is included withreversing loopFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Left Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Left Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-7
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Right Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the rightcorner of the transport loop (to save space) at the minimumdistance allowed between the Parallel and loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestationsParallel Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3)queue sensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree CornerModules NOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module isincluded with reversing loop
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Right Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Right Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-8
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel End Gates link Parallel Tracks to the end of the transportloop (to save space) at the minimum distance allowed between theParallel and transport loop tracks Non-reversing Parallel Tracksare as wide as the transport loop (See page 1-3 for various waysto use Parallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on theParallel Track the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop)for opposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel End Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queue sensorsfor traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner Modules TheReverse Loop version includes (2) additional Corner Modules
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel End Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-9
Bridge Tracks can be In-Line (for bypassing operations on a loop)and Off-Line (for building custom Spur Tracks) In-Line BridgeGates connect Bridge Tracks to opposite sides of a transport loopBy swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Bridge Tracks the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsBridge Tracks Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic controlFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gates link custom-sized Spurs anywherealong a Linear Track Module and include (1) pneumaticallyoperated switching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) palletstops and (3) queue sensors for traffic control Custom Spurshave variable separation between the In amp Out Gates therefore anadditional Pallet Stop is included for staging pallet(s) betweenthem This minimizes pallet transfer time through the Bridge
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Modules (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Bridge Track GatingIn-Line Bridge Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
In-Line Bridge Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleForward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-10
Off-Line Bridge Right Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the rightcorner of a transport loop An additional Pallet Stop is included forstaging pallet(s) between the In amp Out Gates This minimizespallet transfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp OutGates on a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverseloop) for access or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Off-Line Bridge Left Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the leftcorner of a transport loop Custom Spurs have variable separationbetween the In amp Out Gates therefore an additional Pallet Stop isincluded for staging pallet(s) between them This minimizes pallettransfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp Out Gateson a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foraccess or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specify
bull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Bridge Track GatingOff-Line Bridge Left Gate
Off-Line Bridge Right Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate Left Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate LeftReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate Right Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate RightReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-1
Track Mounted Pallet Stops
Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
The Track Mounted Pallet Stop mounts directly to the trackprofile and includes an actuated pawl lever that preciselystops the Pallet guide pins Rails secure the pallet position inthe lateral direction An inductive sensor embedded in the railsupport verifies that the pallet pin is in position This allowsstopping on multiple pallet pins or indexing through a stationAn anti-reversing latching pawl can be added to preventupstream-applied loads from moving the pallet backwards inthe stop (see Accessories)
Pallet Stops with Long Guide Rails are used in applicationswhere the spacing between any two pallet posts is 150 mm orless Pallet Stops with Short Guide Rails are used primarilyfor pallet traffic control at gates or anywhere queuing ofpallets needs to be controlled Stops with Short Guide Railsmay also be used to position longer pallets in an automaticstation when the spacing between any two posts is greaterthan 150 mm together with a Supplemental Guide
HD Pallet Stops have a larger release cylinder and arespecified when there is a high back pressure load on the stopBack pressure is a function of pallet weight number of palletsin queue and conveyor belt speed Choose an HD PalletStop when the back pressure load exceeds 180 N
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering InformationIO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HD Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
HD Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Supplemental Guide
AAA-S22-41800 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-41900 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42000 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-42100 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-42200 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42300 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43200 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43300 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43400 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43500 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43600 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43700 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AFH-A22-00623 Supplemental Guide 200 wide
AFH-A22-00633 Supplemental Guide 250 wide
AFH-A22-00643 Supplemental Guide 300 wide
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Corners 4-1
Corner Modules are are typically connected to any Single orDouble Track Module and used to change the pallet directionby 90 or 180 degrees They can be used to form CompactLoops combined with Gate Modules (Chapter 5) to createcustom Spur Tracks or configured with Linear Tracks tomake serpentine or any shape systems
Corner Modules mount to each of the adjacent modules andinclude a belt drive unit angled at 45 degrees to quickly andefficiently transfer a pallet through the turn
Standard speed 418 mmsStandard voltage 208 V 60 Hz
Ordering Information
Corner Module
90ordm Corner Module 180ordm Corner Module
IO Requirements90 Deg Corner 1 Motor180 Deg Corner 2 Motors
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-1
Gating Systems
Gating Systems are an important part of the HFL 2002-STransfer System They allow pallets to be diverted from themain transport loop onto Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
This Section offers the Gating System mechanisms that areused to divert pallets into Spurs or Bridge Tracks Commonexamples of Gating Systems are shown To better clarifyhow these Gates are used it is important to understand thedefinition of Spur Tracks and Bridge Tracks
There are two types of Spur Tracks Magazines with workarea perpendicular to the main loop and Parallel Trackswith work area parallel to the main loop Both can be usedfor manual or automatic workstations By swapping In amp OutGates of a Spur Track a batch-processing cell can becreated that allows cyclic repetitions at the stations Thisalso reverses pallet orientation for access from the oppositeside Note that Spur Tracks can be placed directly on thecorners of a transport loop which helps save floor space
There are two types of Bridge Tracks In-Line Tracksused to bypass operations on a transport loop and Off-LineTracks used to create custom Spur Tracks
Gating Systems mount to Linear Track Modules (Section 3)and include switching gates pallet stops queue sensorsand Corner Modules (for parallel tracks) Pallet Coding(Section 9) is typically required to identify pallets inconjunction with Gating Systems
Overview
Magazine Spur (Middle)With Manual Workstation
Parallel Spur (Right)Reverse Loop
In-Line Bridge Track
Table Module
Corner Module
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-2
Magazine Gating
Magazine Middle Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between its Linear Tracks to the mainloop (ie there is no separation between the In amp Out Gates alongthe main loop track) A 180deg Corner Module (Section 4) fitsperfectly on the opposite end of the Magazine Magazines aretypically used for manual workstations (See page 1-3) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2) queuesensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
Magazine Middle Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Middle GateGate-Only
Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-3
Magazine Gating
Magazine Left Gates connect Magazines that have the minimumdistance possible between their Linear Tracks directly to thecorners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of theMagazine By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine thepallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite sideaccess andor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Left Gates include(1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine Left Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel DirectionPallet Travel
Direction
Magazine Left Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-4
Magazine Right Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between their Linear Tracks directly tothe corners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of whateverlength Double Track Module is used for the Spur By swappingthe In amp Out Gates on the Spur the pallet orientation can berotated (reverse loop) for opposite side access andor to performcyclic repetitions on the Spur stationsMagazine Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine GatingMagazine Right Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Right Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-5
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Middle Gates link Parallel Tracks to the transport loop atthe minimum distance allowed between the Parallel and transportloop tracks (ie there is no separation between the In-Gate andthe Corner to the Linear Track) Parallel tracks can be any length(See page 1-3 for various ways to use Parallel Tracks) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Parallel Track the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsParallel Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel Middle Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Middle Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-6
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Left Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the left cornerof the transport loop (to save space) at the minimum distanceallowed between the Parallel and transport loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesNOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module is included withreversing loopFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Left Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Left Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-7
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Right Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the rightcorner of the transport loop (to save space) at the minimumdistance allowed between the Parallel and loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestationsParallel Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3)queue sensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree CornerModules NOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module isincluded with reversing loop
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Right Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Right Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-8
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel End Gates link Parallel Tracks to the end of the transportloop (to save space) at the minimum distance allowed between theParallel and transport loop tracks Non-reversing Parallel Tracksare as wide as the transport loop (See page 1-3 for various waysto use Parallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on theParallel Track the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop)for opposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel End Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queue sensorsfor traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner Modules TheReverse Loop version includes (2) additional Corner Modules
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel End Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-9
Bridge Tracks can be In-Line (for bypassing operations on a loop)and Off-Line (for building custom Spur Tracks) In-Line BridgeGates connect Bridge Tracks to opposite sides of a transport loopBy swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Bridge Tracks the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsBridge Tracks Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic controlFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gates link custom-sized Spurs anywherealong a Linear Track Module and include (1) pneumaticallyoperated switching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) palletstops and (3) queue sensors for traffic control Custom Spurshave variable separation between the In amp Out Gates therefore anadditional Pallet Stop is included for staging pallet(s) betweenthem This minimizes pallet transfer time through the Bridge
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Modules (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Bridge Track GatingIn-Line Bridge Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
In-Line Bridge Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleForward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-10
Off-Line Bridge Right Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the rightcorner of a transport loop An additional Pallet Stop is included forstaging pallet(s) between the In amp Out Gates This minimizespallet transfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp OutGates on a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverseloop) for access or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Off-Line Bridge Left Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the leftcorner of a transport loop Custom Spurs have variable separationbetween the In amp Out Gates therefore an additional Pallet Stop isincluded for staging pallet(s) between them This minimizes pallettransfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp Out Gateson a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foraccess or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specify
bull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Bridge Track GatingOff-Line Bridge Left Gate
Off-Line Bridge Right Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate Left Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate LeftReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate Right Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate RightReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-1
Track Mounted Pallet Stops
Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
The Track Mounted Pallet Stop mounts directly to the trackprofile and includes an actuated pawl lever that preciselystops the Pallet guide pins Rails secure the pallet position inthe lateral direction An inductive sensor embedded in the railsupport verifies that the pallet pin is in position This allowsstopping on multiple pallet pins or indexing through a stationAn anti-reversing latching pawl can be added to preventupstream-applied loads from moving the pallet backwards inthe stop (see Accessories)
Pallet Stops with Long Guide Rails are used in applicationswhere the spacing between any two pallet posts is 150 mm orless Pallet Stops with Short Guide Rails are used primarilyfor pallet traffic control at gates or anywhere queuing ofpallets needs to be controlled Stops with Short Guide Railsmay also be used to position longer pallets in an automaticstation when the spacing between any two posts is greaterthan 150 mm together with a Supplemental Guide
HD Pallet Stops have a larger release cylinder and arespecified when there is a high back pressure load on the stopBack pressure is a function of pallet weight number of palletsin queue and conveyor belt speed Choose an HD PalletStop when the back pressure load exceeds 180 N
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering InformationIO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HD Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
HD Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Supplemental Guide
AAA-S22-41800 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-41900 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42000 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-42100 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-42200 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42300 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43200 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43300 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43400 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43500 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43600 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43700 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AFH-A22-00623 Supplemental Guide 200 wide
AFH-A22-00633 Supplemental Guide 250 wide
AFH-A22-00643 Supplemental Guide 300 wide
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-1
Gating Systems
Gating Systems are an important part of the HFL 2002-STransfer System They allow pallets to be diverted from themain transport loop onto Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
This Section offers the Gating System mechanisms that areused to divert pallets into Spurs or Bridge Tracks Commonexamples of Gating Systems are shown To better clarifyhow these Gates are used it is important to understand thedefinition of Spur Tracks and Bridge Tracks
There are two types of Spur Tracks Magazines with workarea perpendicular to the main loop and Parallel Trackswith work area parallel to the main loop Both can be usedfor manual or automatic workstations By swapping In amp OutGates of a Spur Track a batch-processing cell can becreated that allows cyclic repetitions at the stations Thisalso reverses pallet orientation for access from the oppositeside Note that Spur Tracks can be placed directly on thecorners of a transport loop which helps save floor space
There are two types of Bridge Tracks In-Line Tracksused to bypass operations on a transport loop and Off-LineTracks used to create custom Spur Tracks
Gating Systems mount to Linear Track Modules (Section 3)and include switching gates pallet stops queue sensorsand Corner Modules (for parallel tracks) Pallet Coding(Section 9) is typically required to identify pallets inconjunction with Gating Systems
Overview
Magazine Spur (Middle)With Manual Workstation
Parallel Spur (Right)Reverse Loop
In-Line Bridge Track
Table Module
Corner Module
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-2
Magazine Gating
Magazine Middle Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between its Linear Tracks to the mainloop (ie there is no separation between the In amp Out Gates alongthe main loop track) A 180deg Corner Module (Section 4) fitsperfectly on the opposite end of the Magazine Magazines aretypically used for manual workstations (See page 1-3) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2) queuesensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
Magazine Middle Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Middle GateGate-Only
Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-3
Magazine Gating
Magazine Left Gates connect Magazines that have the minimumdistance possible between their Linear Tracks directly to thecorners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of theMagazine By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine thepallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite sideaccess andor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Left Gates include(1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine Left Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel DirectionPallet Travel
Direction
Magazine Left Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-4
Magazine Right Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between their Linear Tracks directly tothe corners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of whateverlength Double Track Module is used for the Spur By swappingthe In amp Out Gates on the Spur the pallet orientation can berotated (reverse loop) for opposite side access andor to performcyclic repetitions on the Spur stationsMagazine Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine GatingMagazine Right Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Right Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-5
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Middle Gates link Parallel Tracks to the transport loop atthe minimum distance allowed between the Parallel and transportloop tracks (ie there is no separation between the In-Gate andthe Corner to the Linear Track) Parallel tracks can be any length(See page 1-3 for various ways to use Parallel Tracks) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Parallel Track the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsParallel Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel Middle Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Middle Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-6
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Left Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the left cornerof the transport loop (to save space) at the minimum distanceallowed between the Parallel and transport loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesNOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module is included withreversing loopFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Left Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Left Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-7
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Right Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the rightcorner of the transport loop (to save space) at the minimumdistance allowed between the Parallel and loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestationsParallel Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3)queue sensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree CornerModules NOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module isincluded with reversing loop
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Right Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Right Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-8
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel End Gates link Parallel Tracks to the end of the transportloop (to save space) at the minimum distance allowed between theParallel and transport loop tracks Non-reversing Parallel Tracksare as wide as the transport loop (See page 1-3 for various waysto use Parallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on theParallel Track the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop)for opposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel End Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queue sensorsfor traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner Modules TheReverse Loop version includes (2) additional Corner Modules
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel End Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-9
Bridge Tracks can be In-Line (for bypassing operations on a loop)and Off-Line (for building custom Spur Tracks) In-Line BridgeGates connect Bridge Tracks to opposite sides of a transport loopBy swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Bridge Tracks the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsBridge Tracks Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic controlFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gates link custom-sized Spurs anywherealong a Linear Track Module and include (1) pneumaticallyoperated switching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) palletstops and (3) queue sensors for traffic control Custom Spurshave variable separation between the In amp Out Gates therefore anadditional Pallet Stop is included for staging pallet(s) betweenthem This minimizes pallet transfer time through the Bridge
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Modules (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Bridge Track GatingIn-Line Bridge Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
In-Line Bridge Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleForward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-10
Off-Line Bridge Right Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the rightcorner of a transport loop An additional Pallet Stop is included forstaging pallet(s) between the In amp Out Gates This minimizespallet transfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp OutGates on a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverseloop) for access or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Off-Line Bridge Left Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the leftcorner of a transport loop Custom Spurs have variable separationbetween the In amp Out Gates therefore an additional Pallet Stop isincluded for staging pallet(s) between them This minimizes pallettransfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp Out Gateson a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foraccess or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specify
bull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Bridge Track GatingOff-Line Bridge Left Gate
Off-Line Bridge Right Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate Left Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate LeftReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate Right Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate RightReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-1
Track Mounted Pallet Stops
Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
The Track Mounted Pallet Stop mounts directly to the trackprofile and includes an actuated pawl lever that preciselystops the Pallet guide pins Rails secure the pallet position inthe lateral direction An inductive sensor embedded in the railsupport verifies that the pallet pin is in position This allowsstopping on multiple pallet pins or indexing through a stationAn anti-reversing latching pawl can be added to preventupstream-applied loads from moving the pallet backwards inthe stop (see Accessories)
Pallet Stops with Long Guide Rails are used in applicationswhere the spacing between any two pallet posts is 150 mm orless Pallet Stops with Short Guide Rails are used primarilyfor pallet traffic control at gates or anywhere queuing ofpallets needs to be controlled Stops with Short Guide Railsmay also be used to position longer pallets in an automaticstation when the spacing between any two posts is greaterthan 150 mm together with a Supplemental Guide
HD Pallet Stops have a larger release cylinder and arespecified when there is a high back pressure load on the stopBack pressure is a function of pallet weight number of palletsin queue and conveyor belt speed Choose an HD PalletStop when the back pressure load exceeds 180 N
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering InformationIO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HD Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
HD Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Supplemental Guide
AAA-S22-41800 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-41900 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42000 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-42100 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-42200 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42300 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43200 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43300 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43400 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43500 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43600 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43700 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AFH-A22-00623 Supplemental Guide 200 wide
AFH-A22-00633 Supplemental Guide 250 wide
AFH-A22-00643 Supplemental Guide 300 wide
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-2
Magazine Gating
Magazine Middle Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between its Linear Tracks to the mainloop (ie there is no separation between the In amp Out Gates alongthe main loop track) A 180deg Corner Module (Section 4) fitsperfectly on the opposite end of the Magazine Magazines aretypically used for manual workstations (See page 1-3) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2) queuesensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
Magazine Middle Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Middle GateGate-Only
Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-3
Magazine Gating
Magazine Left Gates connect Magazines that have the minimumdistance possible between their Linear Tracks directly to thecorners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of theMagazine By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine thepallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite sideaccess andor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Left Gates include(1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine Left Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel DirectionPallet Travel
Direction
Magazine Left Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-4
Magazine Right Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between their Linear Tracks directly tothe corners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of whateverlength Double Track Module is used for the Spur By swappingthe In amp Out Gates on the Spur the pallet orientation can berotated (reverse loop) for opposite side access andor to performcyclic repetitions on the Spur stationsMagazine Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine GatingMagazine Right Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Right Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-5
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Middle Gates link Parallel Tracks to the transport loop atthe minimum distance allowed between the Parallel and transportloop tracks (ie there is no separation between the In-Gate andthe Corner to the Linear Track) Parallel tracks can be any length(See page 1-3 for various ways to use Parallel Tracks) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Parallel Track the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsParallel Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel Middle Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Middle Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-6
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Left Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the left cornerof the transport loop (to save space) at the minimum distanceallowed between the Parallel and transport loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesNOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module is included withreversing loopFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Left Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Left Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-7
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Right Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the rightcorner of the transport loop (to save space) at the minimumdistance allowed between the Parallel and loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestationsParallel Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3)queue sensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree CornerModules NOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module isincluded with reversing loop
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Right Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Right Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-8
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel End Gates link Parallel Tracks to the end of the transportloop (to save space) at the minimum distance allowed between theParallel and transport loop tracks Non-reversing Parallel Tracksare as wide as the transport loop (See page 1-3 for various waysto use Parallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on theParallel Track the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop)for opposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel End Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queue sensorsfor traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner Modules TheReverse Loop version includes (2) additional Corner Modules
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel End Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-9
Bridge Tracks can be In-Line (for bypassing operations on a loop)and Off-Line (for building custom Spur Tracks) In-Line BridgeGates connect Bridge Tracks to opposite sides of a transport loopBy swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Bridge Tracks the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsBridge Tracks Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic controlFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gates link custom-sized Spurs anywherealong a Linear Track Module and include (1) pneumaticallyoperated switching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) palletstops and (3) queue sensors for traffic control Custom Spurshave variable separation between the In amp Out Gates therefore anadditional Pallet Stop is included for staging pallet(s) betweenthem This minimizes pallet transfer time through the Bridge
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Modules (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Bridge Track GatingIn-Line Bridge Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
In-Line Bridge Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleForward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-10
Off-Line Bridge Right Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the rightcorner of a transport loop An additional Pallet Stop is included forstaging pallet(s) between the In amp Out Gates This minimizespallet transfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp OutGates on a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverseloop) for access or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Off-Line Bridge Left Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the leftcorner of a transport loop Custom Spurs have variable separationbetween the In amp Out Gates therefore an additional Pallet Stop isincluded for staging pallet(s) between them This minimizes pallettransfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp Out Gateson a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foraccess or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specify
bull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Bridge Track GatingOff-Line Bridge Left Gate
Off-Line Bridge Right Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate Left Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate LeftReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate Right Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate RightReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-1
Track Mounted Pallet Stops
Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
The Track Mounted Pallet Stop mounts directly to the trackprofile and includes an actuated pawl lever that preciselystops the Pallet guide pins Rails secure the pallet position inthe lateral direction An inductive sensor embedded in the railsupport verifies that the pallet pin is in position This allowsstopping on multiple pallet pins or indexing through a stationAn anti-reversing latching pawl can be added to preventupstream-applied loads from moving the pallet backwards inthe stop (see Accessories)
Pallet Stops with Long Guide Rails are used in applicationswhere the spacing between any two pallet posts is 150 mm orless Pallet Stops with Short Guide Rails are used primarilyfor pallet traffic control at gates or anywhere queuing ofpallets needs to be controlled Stops with Short Guide Railsmay also be used to position longer pallets in an automaticstation when the spacing between any two posts is greaterthan 150 mm together with a Supplemental Guide
HD Pallet Stops have a larger release cylinder and arespecified when there is a high back pressure load on the stopBack pressure is a function of pallet weight number of palletsin queue and conveyor belt speed Choose an HD PalletStop when the back pressure load exceeds 180 N
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering InformationIO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HD Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
HD Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Supplemental Guide
AAA-S22-41800 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-41900 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42000 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-42100 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-42200 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42300 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43200 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43300 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43400 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43500 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43600 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43700 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AFH-A22-00623 Supplemental Guide 200 wide
AFH-A22-00633 Supplemental Guide 250 wide
AFH-A22-00643 Supplemental Guide 300 wide
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-3
Magazine Gating
Magazine Left Gates connect Magazines that have the minimumdistance possible between their Linear Tracks directly to thecorners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of theMagazine By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Magazine thepallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite sideaccess andor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsMagazine Left Gates include(1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine Left Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel DirectionPallet Travel
Direction
Magazine Left Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-4
Magazine Right Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between their Linear Tracks directly tothe corners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of whateverlength Double Track Module is used for the Spur By swappingthe In amp Out Gates on the Spur the pallet orientation can berotated (reverse loop) for opposite side access andor to performcyclic repetitions on the Spur stationsMagazine Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine GatingMagazine Right Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Right Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-5
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Middle Gates link Parallel Tracks to the transport loop atthe minimum distance allowed between the Parallel and transportloop tracks (ie there is no separation between the In-Gate andthe Corner to the Linear Track) Parallel tracks can be any length(See page 1-3 for various ways to use Parallel Tracks) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Parallel Track the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsParallel Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel Middle Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Middle Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-6
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Left Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the left cornerof the transport loop (to save space) at the minimum distanceallowed between the Parallel and transport loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesNOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module is included withreversing loopFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Left Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Left Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-7
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Right Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the rightcorner of the transport loop (to save space) at the minimumdistance allowed between the Parallel and loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestationsParallel Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3)queue sensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree CornerModules NOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module isincluded with reversing loop
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Right Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Right Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-8
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel End Gates link Parallel Tracks to the end of the transportloop (to save space) at the minimum distance allowed between theParallel and transport loop tracks Non-reversing Parallel Tracksare as wide as the transport loop (See page 1-3 for various waysto use Parallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on theParallel Track the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop)for opposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel End Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queue sensorsfor traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner Modules TheReverse Loop version includes (2) additional Corner Modules
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel End Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-9
Bridge Tracks can be In-Line (for bypassing operations on a loop)and Off-Line (for building custom Spur Tracks) In-Line BridgeGates connect Bridge Tracks to opposite sides of a transport loopBy swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Bridge Tracks the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsBridge Tracks Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic controlFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gates link custom-sized Spurs anywherealong a Linear Track Module and include (1) pneumaticallyoperated switching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) palletstops and (3) queue sensors for traffic control Custom Spurshave variable separation between the In amp Out Gates therefore anadditional Pallet Stop is included for staging pallet(s) betweenthem This minimizes pallet transfer time through the Bridge
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Modules (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Bridge Track GatingIn-Line Bridge Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
In-Line Bridge Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleForward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-10
Off-Line Bridge Right Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the rightcorner of a transport loop An additional Pallet Stop is included forstaging pallet(s) between the In amp Out Gates This minimizespallet transfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp OutGates on a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverseloop) for access or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Off-Line Bridge Left Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the leftcorner of a transport loop Custom Spurs have variable separationbetween the In amp Out Gates therefore an additional Pallet Stop isincluded for staging pallet(s) between them This minimizes pallettransfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp Out Gateson a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foraccess or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specify
bull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Bridge Track GatingOff-Line Bridge Left Gate
Off-Line Bridge Right Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate Left Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate LeftReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate Right Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate RightReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-1
Track Mounted Pallet Stops
Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
The Track Mounted Pallet Stop mounts directly to the trackprofile and includes an actuated pawl lever that preciselystops the Pallet guide pins Rails secure the pallet position inthe lateral direction An inductive sensor embedded in the railsupport verifies that the pallet pin is in position This allowsstopping on multiple pallet pins or indexing through a stationAn anti-reversing latching pawl can be added to preventupstream-applied loads from moving the pallet backwards inthe stop (see Accessories)
Pallet Stops with Long Guide Rails are used in applicationswhere the spacing between any two pallet posts is 150 mm orless Pallet Stops with Short Guide Rails are used primarilyfor pallet traffic control at gates or anywhere queuing ofpallets needs to be controlled Stops with Short Guide Railsmay also be used to position longer pallets in an automaticstation when the spacing between any two posts is greaterthan 150 mm together with a Supplemental Guide
HD Pallet Stops have a larger release cylinder and arespecified when there is a high back pressure load on the stopBack pressure is a function of pallet weight number of palletsin queue and conveyor belt speed Choose an HD PalletStop when the back pressure load exceeds 180 N
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering InformationIO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HD Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
HD Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Supplemental Guide
AAA-S22-41800 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-41900 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42000 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-42100 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-42200 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42300 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43200 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43300 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43400 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43500 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43600 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43700 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AFH-A22-00623 Supplemental Guide 200 wide
AFH-A22-00633 Supplemental Guide 250 wide
AFH-A22-00643 Supplemental Guide 300 wide
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-4
Magazine Right Gates connect Magazines that have theminimum distance possible between their Linear Tracks directly tothe corners of the transport loop (to save space) A 180deg CornerModule (Section 4) fits perfectly on the opposite end of whateverlength Double Track Module is used for the Spur By swappingthe In amp Out Gates on the Spur the pallet orientation can berotated (reverse loop) for opposite side access andor to performcyclic repetitions on the Spur stationsMagazine Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (2) pallet stops (2)queue sensors and (1) 180 degree Corner Module (optional)For complete installation specifybull Double Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Magazine GatingMagazine Right Gate
Gate OnlyReverse Loop
Gate OnlyForward through Gate
Gate and 180 Degree CornerReverse Loop
Gate and 180 Degree CornerForward through Gate
IO Requirements4 Inputs 3 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Magazine Right Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-5
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Middle Gates link Parallel Tracks to the transport loop atthe minimum distance allowed between the Parallel and transportloop tracks (ie there is no separation between the In-Gate andthe Corner to the Linear Track) Parallel tracks can be any length(See page 1-3 for various ways to use Parallel Tracks) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Parallel Track the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsParallel Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel Middle Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Middle Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-6
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Left Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the left cornerof the transport loop (to save space) at the minimum distanceallowed between the Parallel and transport loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesNOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module is included withreversing loopFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Left Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Left Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-7
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Right Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the rightcorner of the transport loop (to save space) at the minimumdistance allowed between the Parallel and loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestationsParallel Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3)queue sensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree CornerModules NOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module isincluded with reversing loop
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Right Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Right Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-8
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel End Gates link Parallel Tracks to the end of the transportloop (to save space) at the minimum distance allowed between theParallel and transport loop tracks Non-reversing Parallel Tracksare as wide as the transport loop (See page 1-3 for various waysto use Parallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on theParallel Track the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop)for opposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel End Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queue sensorsfor traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner Modules TheReverse Loop version includes (2) additional Corner Modules
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel End Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-9
Bridge Tracks can be In-Line (for bypassing operations on a loop)and Off-Line (for building custom Spur Tracks) In-Line BridgeGates connect Bridge Tracks to opposite sides of a transport loopBy swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Bridge Tracks the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsBridge Tracks Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic controlFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gates link custom-sized Spurs anywherealong a Linear Track Module and include (1) pneumaticallyoperated switching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) palletstops and (3) queue sensors for traffic control Custom Spurshave variable separation between the In amp Out Gates therefore anadditional Pallet Stop is included for staging pallet(s) betweenthem This minimizes pallet transfer time through the Bridge
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Modules (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Bridge Track GatingIn-Line Bridge Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
In-Line Bridge Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleForward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-10
Off-Line Bridge Right Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the rightcorner of a transport loop An additional Pallet Stop is included forstaging pallet(s) between the In amp Out Gates This minimizespallet transfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp OutGates on a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverseloop) for access or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Off-Line Bridge Left Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the leftcorner of a transport loop Custom Spurs have variable separationbetween the In amp Out Gates therefore an additional Pallet Stop isincluded for staging pallet(s) between them This minimizes pallettransfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp Out Gateson a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foraccess or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specify
bull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Bridge Track GatingOff-Line Bridge Left Gate
Off-Line Bridge Right Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate Left Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate LeftReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate Right Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate RightReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-1
Track Mounted Pallet Stops
Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
The Track Mounted Pallet Stop mounts directly to the trackprofile and includes an actuated pawl lever that preciselystops the Pallet guide pins Rails secure the pallet position inthe lateral direction An inductive sensor embedded in the railsupport verifies that the pallet pin is in position This allowsstopping on multiple pallet pins or indexing through a stationAn anti-reversing latching pawl can be added to preventupstream-applied loads from moving the pallet backwards inthe stop (see Accessories)
Pallet Stops with Long Guide Rails are used in applicationswhere the spacing between any two pallet posts is 150 mm orless Pallet Stops with Short Guide Rails are used primarilyfor pallet traffic control at gates or anywhere queuing ofpallets needs to be controlled Stops with Short Guide Railsmay also be used to position longer pallets in an automaticstation when the spacing between any two posts is greaterthan 150 mm together with a Supplemental Guide
HD Pallet Stops have a larger release cylinder and arespecified when there is a high back pressure load on the stopBack pressure is a function of pallet weight number of palletsin queue and conveyor belt speed Choose an HD PalletStop when the back pressure load exceeds 180 N
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering InformationIO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HD Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
HD Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Supplemental Guide
AAA-S22-41800 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-41900 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42000 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-42100 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-42200 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42300 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43200 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43300 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43400 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43500 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43600 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43700 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AFH-A22-00623 Supplemental Guide 200 wide
AFH-A22-00633 Supplemental Guide 250 wide
AFH-A22-00643 Supplemental Guide 300 wide
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-5
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Middle Gates link Parallel Tracks to the transport loop atthe minimum distance allowed between the Parallel and transportloop tracks (ie there is no separation between the In-Gate andthe Corner to the Linear Track) Parallel tracks can be any length(See page 1-3 for various ways to use Parallel Tracks) Byswapping the In amp Out Gates on the Parallel Track the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsParallel Middle Gates can be placed anywhere along a LinearTrack Module and include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel Middle Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Middle Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-6
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Left Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the left cornerof the transport loop (to save space) at the minimum distanceallowed between the Parallel and transport loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesNOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module is included withreversing loopFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Left Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Left Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-7
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Right Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the rightcorner of the transport loop (to save space) at the minimumdistance allowed between the Parallel and loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestationsParallel Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3)queue sensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree CornerModules NOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module isincluded with reversing loop
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Right Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Right Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-8
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel End Gates link Parallel Tracks to the end of the transportloop (to save space) at the minimum distance allowed between theParallel and transport loop tracks Non-reversing Parallel Tracksare as wide as the transport loop (See page 1-3 for various waysto use Parallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on theParallel Track the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop)for opposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel End Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queue sensorsfor traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner Modules TheReverse Loop version includes (2) additional Corner Modules
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel End Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-9
Bridge Tracks can be In-Line (for bypassing operations on a loop)and Off-Line (for building custom Spur Tracks) In-Line BridgeGates connect Bridge Tracks to opposite sides of a transport loopBy swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Bridge Tracks the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsBridge Tracks Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic controlFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gates link custom-sized Spurs anywherealong a Linear Track Module and include (1) pneumaticallyoperated switching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) palletstops and (3) queue sensors for traffic control Custom Spurshave variable separation between the In amp Out Gates therefore anadditional Pallet Stop is included for staging pallet(s) betweenthem This minimizes pallet transfer time through the Bridge
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Modules (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Bridge Track GatingIn-Line Bridge Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
In-Line Bridge Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleForward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-10
Off-Line Bridge Right Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the rightcorner of a transport loop An additional Pallet Stop is included forstaging pallet(s) between the In amp Out Gates This minimizespallet transfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp OutGates on a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverseloop) for access or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Off-Line Bridge Left Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the leftcorner of a transport loop Custom Spurs have variable separationbetween the In amp Out Gates therefore an additional Pallet Stop isincluded for staging pallet(s) between them This minimizes pallettransfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp Out Gateson a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foraccess or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specify
bull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Bridge Track GatingOff-Line Bridge Left Gate
Off-Line Bridge Right Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate Left Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate LeftReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate Right Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate RightReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-1
Track Mounted Pallet Stops
Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
The Track Mounted Pallet Stop mounts directly to the trackprofile and includes an actuated pawl lever that preciselystops the Pallet guide pins Rails secure the pallet position inthe lateral direction An inductive sensor embedded in the railsupport verifies that the pallet pin is in position This allowsstopping on multiple pallet pins or indexing through a stationAn anti-reversing latching pawl can be added to preventupstream-applied loads from moving the pallet backwards inthe stop (see Accessories)
Pallet Stops with Long Guide Rails are used in applicationswhere the spacing between any two pallet posts is 150 mm orless Pallet Stops with Short Guide Rails are used primarilyfor pallet traffic control at gates or anywhere queuing ofpallets needs to be controlled Stops with Short Guide Railsmay also be used to position longer pallets in an automaticstation when the spacing between any two posts is greaterthan 150 mm together with a Supplemental Guide
HD Pallet Stops have a larger release cylinder and arespecified when there is a high back pressure load on the stopBack pressure is a function of pallet weight number of palletsin queue and conveyor belt speed Choose an HD PalletStop when the back pressure load exceeds 180 N
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering InformationIO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HD Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
HD Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Supplemental Guide
AAA-S22-41800 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-41900 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42000 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-42100 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-42200 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42300 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43200 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43300 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43400 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43500 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43600 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43700 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AFH-A22-00623 Supplemental Guide 200 wide
AFH-A22-00633 Supplemental Guide 250 wide
AFH-A22-00643 Supplemental Guide 300 wide
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-6
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Left Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the left cornerof the transport loop (to save space) at the minimum distanceallowed between the Parallel and transport loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queuesensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner ModulesNOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module is included withreversing loopFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Left Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Left Gate Reverse Loop
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-7
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Right Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the rightcorner of the transport loop (to save space) at the minimumdistance allowed between the Parallel and loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestationsParallel Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3)queue sensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree CornerModules NOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module isincluded with reversing loop
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Right Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Right Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-8
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel End Gates link Parallel Tracks to the end of the transportloop (to save space) at the minimum distance allowed between theParallel and transport loop tracks Non-reversing Parallel Tracksare as wide as the transport loop (See page 1-3 for various waysto use Parallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on theParallel Track the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop)for opposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel End Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queue sensorsfor traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner Modules TheReverse Loop version includes (2) additional Corner Modules
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel End Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-9
Bridge Tracks can be In-Line (for bypassing operations on a loop)and Off-Line (for building custom Spur Tracks) In-Line BridgeGates connect Bridge Tracks to opposite sides of a transport loopBy swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Bridge Tracks the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsBridge Tracks Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic controlFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gates link custom-sized Spurs anywherealong a Linear Track Module and include (1) pneumaticallyoperated switching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) palletstops and (3) queue sensors for traffic control Custom Spurshave variable separation between the In amp Out Gates therefore anadditional Pallet Stop is included for staging pallet(s) betweenthem This minimizes pallet transfer time through the Bridge
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Modules (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Bridge Track GatingIn-Line Bridge Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
In-Line Bridge Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleForward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-10
Off-Line Bridge Right Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the rightcorner of a transport loop An additional Pallet Stop is included forstaging pallet(s) between the In amp Out Gates This minimizespallet transfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp OutGates on a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverseloop) for access or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Off-Line Bridge Left Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the leftcorner of a transport loop Custom Spurs have variable separationbetween the In amp Out Gates therefore an additional Pallet Stop isincluded for staging pallet(s) between them This minimizes pallettransfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp Out Gateson a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foraccess or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specify
bull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Bridge Track GatingOff-Line Bridge Left Gate
Off-Line Bridge Right Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate Left Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate LeftReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate Right Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate RightReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-1
Track Mounted Pallet Stops
Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
The Track Mounted Pallet Stop mounts directly to the trackprofile and includes an actuated pawl lever that preciselystops the Pallet guide pins Rails secure the pallet position inthe lateral direction An inductive sensor embedded in the railsupport verifies that the pallet pin is in position This allowsstopping on multiple pallet pins or indexing through a stationAn anti-reversing latching pawl can be added to preventupstream-applied loads from moving the pallet backwards inthe stop (see Accessories)
Pallet Stops with Long Guide Rails are used in applicationswhere the spacing between any two pallet posts is 150 mm orless Pallet Stops with Short Guide Rails are used primarilyfor pallet traffic control at gates or anywhere queuing ofpallets needs to be controlled Stops with Short Guide Railsmay also be used to position longer pallets in an automaticstation when the spacing between any two posts is greaterthan 150 mm together with a Supplemental Guide
HD Pallet Stops have a larger release cylinder and arespecified when there is a high back pressure load on the stopBack pressure is a function of pallet weight number of palletsin queue and conveyor belt speed Choose an HD PalletStop when the back pressure load exceeds 180 N
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering InformationIO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HD Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
HD Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Supplemental Guide
AAA-S22-41800 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-41900 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42000 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-42100 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-42200 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42300 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43200 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43300 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43400 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43500 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43600 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43700 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AFH-A22-00623 Supplemental Guide 200 wide
AFH-A22-00633 Supplemental Guide 250 wide
AFH-A22-00643 Supplemental Guide 300 wide
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-7
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel Right Gates link Parallel Tracks directly to the rightcorner of the transport loop (to save space) at the minimumdistance allowed between the Parallel and loop tracks ParallelTracks can be any length (See page 1-3 for various ways to useParallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on the ParallelTrack the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foropposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestationsParallel Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3)queue sensors for traffic control and (2) 90 degree CornerModules NOTE (1) additional 90 degree Corner Module isincluded with reversing loop
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Left or right orientation of the Parallel Track and Gate isdetermined by its location when the loop drawing is rotated untilthe Parallel Track is on top
Ordering Information
Parallel Right Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
Parallel Right Gate Forward
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-8
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel End Gates link Parallel Tracks to the end of the transportloop (to save space) at the minimum distance allowed between theParallel and transport loop tracks Non-reversing Parallel Tracksare as wide as the transport loop (See page 1-3 for various waysto use Parallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on theParallel Track the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop)for opposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel End Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queue sensorsfor traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner Modules TheReverse Loop version includes (2) additional Corner Modules
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel End Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-9
Bridge Tracks can be In-Line (for bypassing operations on a loop)and Off-Line (for building custom Spur Tracks) In-Line BridgeGates connect Bridge Tracks to opposite sides of a transport loopBy swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Bridge Tracks the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsBridge Tracks Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic controlFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gates link custom-sized Spurs anywherealong a Linear Track Module and include (1) pneumaticallyoperated switching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) palletstops and (3) queue sensors for traffic control Custom Spurshave variable separation between the In amp Out Gates therefore anadditional Pallet Stop is included for staging pallet(s) betweenthem This minimizes pallet transfer time through the Bridge
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Modules (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Bridge Track GatingIn-Line Bridge Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
In-Line Bridge Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleForward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-10
Off-Line Bridge Right Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the rightcorner of a transport loop An additional Pallet Stop is included forstaging pallet(s) between the In amp Out Gates This minimizespallet transfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp OutGates on a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverseloop) for access or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Off-Line Bridge Left Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the leftcorner of a transport loop Custom Spurs have variable separationbetween the In amp Out Gates therefore an additional Pallet Stop isincluded for staging pallet(s) between them This minimizes pallettransfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp Out Gateson a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foraccess or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specify
bull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Bridge Track GatingOff-Line Bridge Left Gate
Off-Line Bridge Right Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate Left Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate LeftReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate Right Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate RightReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-1
Track Mounted Pallet Stops
Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
The Track Mounted Pallet Stop mounts directly to the trackprofile and includes an actuated pawl lever that preciselystops the Pallet guide pins Rails secure the pallet position inthe lateral direction An inductive sensor embedded in the railsupport verifies that the pallet pin is in position This allowsstopping on multiple pallet pins or indexing through a stationAn anti-reversing latching pawl can be added to preventupstream-applied loads from moving the pallet backwards inthe stop (see Accessories)
Pallet Stops with Long Guide Rails are used in applicationswhere the spacing between any two pallet posts is 150 mm orless Pallet Stops with Short Guide Rails are used primarilyfor pallet traffic control at gates or anywhere queuing ofpallets needs to be controlled Stops with Short Guide Railsmay also be used to position longer pallets in an automaticstation when the spacing between any two posts is greaterthan 150 mm together with a Supplemental Guide
HD Pallet Stops have a larger release cylinder and arespecified when there is a high back pressure load on the stopBack pressure is a function of pallet weight number of palletsin queue and conveyor belt speed Choose an HD PalletStop when the back pressure load exceeds 180 N
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering InformationIO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HD Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
HD Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Supplemental Guide
AAA-S22-41800 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-41900 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42000 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-42100 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-42200 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42300 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43200 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43300 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43400 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43500 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43600 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43700 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AFH-A22-00623 Supplemental Guide 200 wide
AFH-A22-00633 Supplemental Guide 250 wide
AFH-A22-00643 Supplemental Guide 300 wide
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-8
Parallel Track Gating
Parallel End Gates link Parallel Tracks to the end of the transportloop (to save space) at the minimum distance allowed between theParallel and transport loop tracks Non-reversing Parallel Tracksare as wide as the transport loop (See page 1-3 for various waysto use Parallel Tracks) By swapping the In amp Out Gates on theParallel Track the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop)for opposite side access andor to perform cyclic repetitions at thestations
Parallel End Gates include (1) pneumatically operated switchinggate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops (3) queue sensorsfor traffic control and (2) 90 degree Corner Modules TheReverse Loop version includes (2) additional Corner Modules
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Parallel End Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Parallel Gate Forward through Gate
Parallel GateReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-9
Bridge Tracks can be In-Line (for bypassing operations on a loop)and Off-Line (for building custom Spur Tracks) In-Line BridgeGates connect Bridge Tracks to opposite sides of a transport loopBy swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Bridge Tracks the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsBridge Tracks Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic controlFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gates link custom-sized Spurs anywherealong a Linear Track Module and include (1) pneumaticallyoperated switching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) palletstops and (3) queue sensors for traffic control Custom Spurshave variable separation between the In amp Out Gates therefore anadditional Pallet Stop is included for staging pallet(s) betweenthem This minimizes pallet transfer time through the Bridge
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Modules (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Bridge Track GatingIn-Line Bridge Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
In-Line Bridge Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleForward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-10
Off-Line Bridge Right Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the rightcorner of a transport loop An additional Pallet Stop is included forstaging pallet(s) between the In amp Out Gates This minimizespallet transfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp OutGates on a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverseloop) for access or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Off-Line Bridge Left Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the leftcorner of a transport loop Custom Spurs have variable separationbetween the In amp Out Gates therefore an additional Pallet Stop isincluded for staging pallet(s) between them This minimizes pallettransfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp Out Gateson a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foraccess or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specify
bull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Bridge Track GatingOff-Line Bridge Left Gate
Off-Line Bridge Right Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate Left Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate LeftReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate Right Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate RightReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-1
Track Mounted Pallet Stops
Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
The Track Mounted Pallet Stop mounts directly to the trackprofile and includes an actuated pawl lever that preciselystops the Pallet guide pins Rails secure the pallet position inthe lateral direction An inductive sensor embedded in the railsupport verifies that the pallet pin is in position This allowsstopping on multiple pallet pins or indexing through a stationAn anti-reversing latching pawl can be added to preventupstream-applied loads from moving the pallet backwards inthe stop (see Accessories)
Pallet Stops with Long Guide Rails are used in applicationswhere the spacing between any two pallet posts is 150 mm orless Pallet Stops with Short Guide Rails are used primarilyfor pallet traffic control at gates or anywhere queuing ofpallets needs to be controlled Stops with Short Guide Railsmay also be used to position longer pallets in an automaticstation when the spacing between any two posts is greaterthan 150 mm together with a Supplemental Guide
HD Pallet Stops have a larger release cylinder and arespecified when there is a high back pressure load on the stopBack pressure is a function of pallet weight number of palletsin queue and conveyor belt speed Choose an HD PalletStop when the back pressure load exceeds 180 N
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering InformationIO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HD Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
HD Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Supplemental Guide
AAA-S22-41800 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-41900 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42000 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-42100 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-42200 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42300 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43200 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43300 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43400 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43500 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43600 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43700 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AFH-A22-00623 Supplemental Guide 200 wide
AFH-A22-00633 Supplemental Guide 250 wide
AFH-A22-00643 Supplemental Guide 300 wide
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-9
Bridge Tracks can be In-Line (for bypassing operations on a loop)and Off-Line (for building custom Spur Tracks) In-Line BridgeGates connect Bridge Tracks to opposite sides of a transport loopBy swapping the In amp Out Gates on the Bridge Tracks the palletorientation can be rotated (reverse loop) for opposite side accessandor to perform cyclic repetitions at the stationsBridge Tracks Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic controlFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gates link custom-sized Spurs anywherealong a Linear Track Module and include (1) pneumaticallyoperated switching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) palletstops and (3) queue sensors for traffic control Custom Spurshave variable separation between the In amp Out Gates therefore anadditional Pallet Stop is included for staging pallet(s) betweenthem This minimizes pallet transfer time through the Bridge
For complete installation specifybull Single Track Modules (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each Outputbull Pallet Coding System (Section 9)
Ordering Information
Bridge Track GatingIn-Line Bridge Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
In-Line Bridge Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate MiddleForward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Middle Gate
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-10
Off-Line Bridge Right Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the rightcorner of a transport loop An additional Pallet Stop is included forstaging pallet(s) between the In amp Out Gates This minimizespallet transfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp OutGates on a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverseloop) for access or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Off-Line Bridge Left Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the leftcorner of a transport loop Custom Spurs have variable separationbetween the In amp Out Gates therefore an additional Pallet Stop isincluded for staging pallet(s) between them This minimizes pallettransfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp Out Gateson a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foraccess or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specify
bull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Bridge Track GatingOff-Line Bridge Left Gate
Off-Line Bridge Right Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate Left Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate LeftReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate Right Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate RightReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-1
Track Mounted Pallet Stops
Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
The Track Mounted Pallet Stop mounts directly to the trackprofile and includes an actuated pawl lever that preciselystops the Pallet guide pins Rails secure the pallet position inthe lateral direction An inductive sensor embedded in the railsupport verifies that the pallet pin is in position This allowsstopping on multiple pallet pins or indexing through a stationAn anti-reversing latching pawl can be added to preventupstream-applied loads from moving the pallet backwards inthe stop (see Accessories)
Pallet Stops with Long Guide Rails are used in applicationswhere the spacing between any two pallet posts is 150 mm orless Pallet Stops with Short Guide Rails are used primarilyfor pallet traffic control at gates or anywhere queuing ofpallets needs to be controlled Stops with Short Guide Railsmay also be used to position longer pallets in an automaticstation when the spacing between any two posts is greaterthan 150 mm together with a Supplemental Guide
HD Pallet Stops have a larger release cylinder and arespecified when there is a high back pressure load on the stopBack pressure is a function of pallet weight number of palletsin queue and conveyor belt speed Choose an HD PalletStop when the back pressure load exceeds 180 N
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering InformationIO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HD Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
HD Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Supplemental Guide
AAA-S22-41800 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-41900 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42000 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-42100 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-42200 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42300 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43200 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43300 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43400 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43500 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43600 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43700 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AFH-A22-00623 Supplemental Guide 200 wide
AFH-A22-00633 Supplemental Guide 250 wide
AFH-A22-00643 Supplemental Guide 300 wide
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Gating Systems 5-10
Off-Line Bridge Right Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the rightcorner of a transport loop An additional Pallet Stop is included forstaging pallet(s) between the In amp Out Gates This minimizespallet transfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp OutGates on a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverseloop) for access or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Right Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specifybull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Off-Line Bridge Left Gates link Spur Tracks directly to the leftcorner of a transport loop Custom Spurs have variable separationbetween the In amp Out Gates therefore an additional Pallet Stop isincluded for staging pallet(s) between them This minimizes pallettransfer time through the Bridge By swapping the In amp Out Gateson a Bridge the pallet orientation can be rotated (reverse loop) foraccess or to perform cyclic repetitions at a stationsOff-Line Bridge Left Gates include (1) pneumatically operatedswitching gate (1) passive switching gate (3) pallet stops and (3)queue sensors for traffic control Note (1) additional 90 degreeCorner Module is included with reversing loopsFor complete installation specify
bull Single Track Module (Section 3)bull Corner Modules (Section 4)bull Valve for each OutputOrdering Information
IO Requirements6 Inputs 4 Outputs
bull Pallet Coding System (Sec 9)
Bridge Track GatingOff-Line Bridge Left Gate
Off-Line Bridge Right Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate Left Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate LeftReverse Loop
Off-Line Bridge Gate Right Forward through Gate
Off-Line Bridge Gate RightReverse Loop
Pallet Travel Direction
Pallet Travel Direction
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-1
Track Mounted Pallet Stops
Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
The Track Mounted Pallet Stop mounts directly to the trackprofile and includes an actuated pawl lever that preciselystops the Pallet guide pins Rails secure the pallet position inthe lateral direction An inductive sensor embedded in the railsupport verifies that the pallet pin is in position This allowsstopping on multiple pallet pins or indexing through a stationAn anti-reversing latching pawl can be added to preventupstream-applied loads from moving the pallet backwards inthe stop (see Accessories)
Pallet Stops with Long Guide Rails are used in applicationswhere the spacing between any two pallet posts is 150 mm orless Pallet Stops with Short Guide Rails are used primarilyfor pallet traffic control at gates or anywhere queuing ofpallets needs to be controlled Stops with Short Guide Railsmay also be used to position longer pallets in an automaticstation when the spacing between any two posts is greaterthan 150 mm together with a Supplemental Guide
HD Pallet Stops have a larger release cylinder and arespecified when there is a high back pressure load on the stopBack pressure is a function of pallet weight number of palletsin queue and conveyor belt speed Choose an HD PalletStop when the back pressure load exceeds 180 N
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering InformationIO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HD Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
HD Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Supplemental Guide
AAA-S22-41800 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-41900 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42000 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-42100 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-42200 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42300 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43200 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43300 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43400 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43500 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43600 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43700 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AFH-A22-00623 Supplemental Guide 200 wide
AFH-A22-00633 Supplemental Guide 250 wide
AFH-A22-00643 Supplemental Guide 300 wide
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-1
Track Mounted Pallet Stops
Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
The Track Mounted Pallet Stop mounts directly to the trackprofile and includes an actuated pawl lever that preciselystops the Pallet guide pins Rails secure the pallet position inthe lateral direction An inductive sensor embedded in the railsupport verifies that the pallet pin is in position This allowsstopping on multiple pallet pins or indexing through a stationAn anti-reversing latching pawl can be added to preventupstream-applied loads from moving the pallet backwards inthe stop (see Accessories)
Pallet Stops with Long Guide Rails are used in applicationswhere the spacing between any two pallet posts is 150 mm orless Pallet Stops with Short Guide Rails are used primarilyfor pallet traffic control at gates or anywhere queuing ofpallets needs to be controlled Stops with Short Guide Railsmay also be used to position longer pallets in an automaticstation when the spacing between any two posts is greaterthan 150 mm together with a Supplemental Guide
HD Pallet Stops have a larger release cylinder and arespecified when there is a high back pressure load on the stopBack pressure is a function of pallet weight number of palletsin queue and conveyor belt speed Choose an HD PalletStop when the back pressure load exceeds 180 N
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering InformationIO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HD Pallet Stop with Long Guide Rails
HD Pallet Stop with Short Guide Rails
Supplemental Guide
AAA-S22-41800 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-41900 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42000 Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-42100 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-42200 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-42300 Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43200 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43300 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43400 HD Pallet Stop Short Guide Rails 300 wide
AAA-S22-43500 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 200 wide
AAA-S22-43600 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 250 wide
AAA-S22-43700 HD Pallet Stop Long Guide Rails 300 wide
AFH-A22-00623 Supplemental Guide 200 wide
AFH-A22-00633 Supplemental Guide 250 wide
AFH-A22-00643 Supplemental Guide 300 wide
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-2
The Table Mounted Pallet Stop is functionally identical toTrack Mounted Pallet Stops except it mounts to a table topOne model works for all 3 track widths and features LongGuide Rails It is used for automatic stations installed in a 745mm high Table Module (see Section 7) Its mounting plateincludes X-Y positional adjustment screws to assist withproper alignment
For complete installation specifybull Valve for each Output
Ordering Information
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Mounted Pallet Stop
Table Top Machining Detail
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-43900 Pallet Stop Table Mounted 745 mm Table
IO Requirements1 24 VDC Input 1 Output
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-3
The Cushion Pallet Stop is used in applications where theshock of the transport pallet striking the pallet stop needs tobe mitigated such as when loose parts are being transportedIt also minimizes impact noise The amount of cushioning iscontrolled by a pressure regulator (supplied)
Sequencing of the stop is as followsbull Pallet enters stops and engages the stop pawlbull The force of the pallet against the pawl causes the cushion
cylinderrsquos piston to retract forcing compressed air backthrough the regulator
bull Once the cushion cylinder is fully retracted a switch ismade and the cushion valve switches on locking thecushion cylinder in the compressed position
bull Once work on the pallet is completed the pallet stop valveopens releasing the pallet
bull Simultaneously the cushion cylinder valve switches offresetting the cushion
A minimum post spacing of 50 mm is required for effectivecushioning
Minimum pallet weight (including tooling product and palletplate) for effective cushioning is 4 Kg
For complete installation specifybull 2 Valves one for each Output
Ordering Information
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Cushioned Pallet Stop
Pneumatic Connection Diagram
Positioning accuracy plusmn 002 mm lateral See Page 2-2 for the proper spacing between pallet posts and guides
AAA-S22-44200 Cushioned Pallet Stop 200 Wide
AAA-S22-44300 Cushioned Pallet Stop 250 Wide
AAA-S22-44400 Cushioned Pallet Stop 300 Wide
IO Requirements2 24 VDC Inputs 2 Outputs
Note Shock absorbing Pallet Stops add a small amount of time to overall station cycle time calculations
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-4
Pallet Stop Accessories
The Pallet Stop Subassembly and HD Pallet StopSubassemblies may be ordered for custom stopapplications including custom rail lengths and mountingoptions
The Latch Pawl prevents the pallet from movingbackwards in the stop when reverse horizontal loads areapplied to the pallet The Latch Pawl is also required ifthe pallet is lifted off a trackrsquos conveyor belt
Ordering Information
Latching Pawl Assembly
AAA-S22-41600 Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-43100 HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
AAA-S22-41700 Latching Pawl Assembly
HD Pallet Stop Subassembly
Pallet Stop Subassembly
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-5
The Pallet Lifting Device lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device is designed to work with the 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) and includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in direction of pallet travel by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
Pallet Lifting Device14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-43800 Pallet Lifting Device
AAA-S22-44000 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post AssemblyMounting Detail
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-6
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment lifts the pallet off the transport conveyor belt and provides support for high vertical force applications Load capacity is rated at 14 kN (3150 lbs) The capacity can be doubled to 28 kN (6300 lbs) by adding 2 optional Post Assemblies
The Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment is designed to mount to a 381 mm thick plate on a 745 mm high Table Module (see section 7) as is often the case in press applications It includes an integral Pallet Stop and Latching Pawl The position of the stop is adjustable so that the load position on the lifting devicersquos support anvils can be optimized The liftrsquos position can be adjusted +- 3 mm in both x and y directions by means of jacking screws
Since the Pallet Lifting Device uses a standard Pallet Stop Assembly to stop and locate a pallet positional accuracy of plusmn002 mm lateral is achieved Contact the factory for applications requiring better accuracy
Pallet Lifting DeviceWith XY Adjustment14 kN28 kN Payload
Ordering Information
Technical Data
Lifting Capacity 200 NSupport Capacity 14 kN 28kN
Lift Stroke 2 mm
IO requirements3 Inputs2 Outputs
AAA-S22-44100 Pallet Lifting Device with XY Adjustment
AAA-S22-44500 Post Assembly (optional ndash 2 required)
Pallet Lifting Device
Post Assembly
Mounting Detail
The following elements must be specified when ordering this unitbull (2) 54-way Directional Control Valves
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Pallet Stops amp Lifts 6-7
In applications where user-designed pallet anvils are specified Lanco provides these accessories to build a complete pallet support system
Spring-Loaded Belt Guides available in two different spring forces support the belt during pallet conveyance but yield to vertical force allowing the pallet to be pushed down against anvils These guides replace the fixed plastic rollers on a Transport Link Order enough guides to accommodate the pallet length
The Short Pallet Stop for Anvils and Long Pallet Stop for Anvils provide extended mounting brackets that can straddle anvils When ordering the Short Pallet Stop for Anvils be sure to also order a Supplemental Guide (see page 6-1)
Pallet Support AccessoriesFor a broad range of load applications with custom anvils
Ordering Information
AAA-S22-92100 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 145 N
AFH-A22-01330 Spring-Loaded Belt Guide ndash 403 N
AAA-S22-42500 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42600 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-42700 Short Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
AAA-S22-42800 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 200 Wide
AAA-S22-42900 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 250 Wide
AAA-S22-43000 Long Pallet Stop for Anvils ndash 300 Wide
Spring-Loaded Belt Guide
Short Pallet Stop for Anvils
Long Pallet Stop for Anvils
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-1
Table Module
Automation equipment and HFL 2002-S components can be firmlysecured onto a rugged 3175 mm thick aluminum plate as part ofLancorsquos Table Module Equipment to perform operations such aspressing screw driving pick amp placing ultrasonic welding rivetingand bonding can be supported External devices such as feedingsystems can also be permanently positioned onto the TableModules These independent modules are easily built debuggedand integrated together to form a completely flexible line
Table Modules are available with integrated compressed airexhaust manifolds and profile frame for safety guardingPolycarbonate safety panels can be provided as an optional itemand are ordered separately
For a complete table module order a base guard frame tableplate door and desired options Door assemblies include hingesand slam latch
Ordering Information
With Frame for Safety Guarding
Transport Track (Ref)
D
L1
L
Plan ViewCapacity 500kg per Table
Module SizeBase Guard Frame Table Plate Door
L L1 D
990 900650 AAA-S21-59700 AAA-S21-59800 AAA-S21-61309
AAA-S21-565001000 AAA-S21-56300 AAA-S21-56400 AAA-S21-61305
1490 1400650 AAA-S21-59200 AAA-S21-59900 AAA-S21-61310
AAA-S21-568001000 AAA-S21-56600 AAA-S21-56700 AAA-S21-61306
1990 1900650 AAA-S21-59500 AAA-S21-59600 AAA-S21-61311
AAA-S21-571001000 AAA-S21-56900 AAA-S21-57000 AAA-S21-61307
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Table Modules 7-2
AccessoriesFor Table Modules
Part No Description
AAA-S21-57200 Supply Manifold
AAA-S21-57300 Exhaust Manifold with Muffler
AAA-S21-73000 Locking Door Switch
AAA-S21-57600 Door Safety Switch RH
AAA-S21-57700 Door Safety Switch LH
AAA-S21-57800 LED Light Bar 23rdquo
AAA-S21-57900 LED Light Bar 45rdquo
AFN-104-00520 Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter
BDG-115-00005 Uni-Block 25 M6 Slot 8
BDG-115-00019 Cover T-Slot Lt Gray Plastic 2M
Locking Door Switch Door Safety Switch LED Light Bar
Supply Manifold
Exhaust Manifold
Air Reservoir ndash 5 liter Uni-Block 25For Affixing Panels
T-Slot Cover
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-1
Manual Workstation
As shown with Single Track Module Canalso be used with Parallel or MagazineSpur Tracks and Double Track Modules
Overview
Manual workstation accessories shown below supporteither seated or standing operations These accessoriesmount directly to the Manual Workstation Floor MountStands (FH Floor Mounts) See pages 3-1 amp 3-4
Also specify a Pallet Stop to hold the pallet in position ateach workstation (Section 6)
AAA-S22-20700 Footrest without Footswitch
AAA-S22-20800 Footrest with Footswitch
AFH-A21-00705 Operator Work Shelf
AFH-A21-00634 Tray for Tote Bins
AFH-A21-00610 Manual Workstation Stand
AFH-A21-00615 Overhead Stand ndash 200 wide system
AFH-A21-00616 Overhead Stand ndash 250 wide system
AFH-A21-00617 Overhead Stand ndash 300 wide system
Footrest with Footswitch
Operator Work Shelf
Tray for Tote Bins
Overhead StandManual Workstation Stand
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Manual Workstations 8-2
Accessories
Manual Workstation
ACT-150-00191 Footswitch Electric
BOJ-115-00001 Bin Hanger 12rdquo Aluminum
BOJ-115-00002 Bin Hanger 6rdquo Aluminum
ANK-115-00001 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00002 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00003 Bin 5375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00004 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Red
ANK-115-00005 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Blue
ANK-115-00006 Bin 7375 x 4125 x 3 Yellow
ANK-115-00007 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00008 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00009 Bin 10875 x 5500 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00010 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Red
ANK-115-00011 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Blue
ANK-115-00012 Bin 10875 x 1100 x 5 Yellow
ANK-115-00013 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00014 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00015 Bin 1075 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00016 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00017 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00018 Bin 1475 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00019 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00020 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00021 Bin 1475 x 1625 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00022 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00023 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00024 Bin 1800 x 825 x 7 Yellow
ANK-115-00025 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Red
ANK-115-00026 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Blue
ANK-115-00027 Bin 1800 x 1650 x 7 Yellow
Bins
Bin Hanger
Footswitch Electric
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-1
Pallet Coding SystemOverviewThe ldquostaterdquo of a pallet (Finished Unfinished Good Reject) isidentified using an RFID Pallet Coding System The ldquoidentityrdquo of apallet (Product A B C) is also detected using this method at eachpoint in the system The state or identity of any pallet can bechanged as the result of an operation at chosen points in anautomation systemIn conjunction with the Pallet Coding System a variety of palletswitching and diverting options are possible using the Pallet GatingSystem (Section 5) for Spur Tracks or Bridge Tracks
Code Mounting on Transfer Pallets
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
ldquoInboardrdquo Sideof
Transport Loop
Transfer pallet travel directionCounterclockwise shown
AAA-S22-82100 RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly ndash Low Profile
AAA-S22-81800 RFID Tag Assembly
RFID ReadWrite Head Assembly
RFID Tag Assembly
Readwrite head informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS0197Operating Temperature 0hellip+80 deg C
Tag informationManufacturer BalluffPart No BIS004ACapacity 2000 bytes
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Coding amp Accessories 9-2
Accessories
Queue Sensor
Retainer
Light Barrier
Guide Setup Tool
For setting the separation of pallet pin guide rails in Pallet Stops(long and short rails) Gated Turns and Corner Modules
Part Number Description
AAA-S22-90600 Setup Tool Pallet Stop amp Corner
To be used in conjunction with Pallet Lifts (Section 6)
Included with Pallet Gating System (Section 5)
7000mmMax Separation
Part Number Description
AAA-S21-93500 Light Barrier
For presence checking of parts at any point in a systemUniversal adjustmentMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Serves as a hold-down when lifting parts from the transfer palletPrevents tilting of a transfer pallet when used with a lifting deviceMounts directly to the transport track profile
Detects transfer pallet queue at a stationMounts directly to the transport track profile
IO Requirements1 Input
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00750 Queue Sensor Mount amp Cable
Part Number Description
AFH-A22-00754 Retainer ZNH 001
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-1
Transport TrackTransport Belt Height 1000 mmSystem Width B(Transfer Pallet Width) 200 250 300 mmTrack Length L(Length of Transport Tracks) 10 15 20 25 30 mStands Floor Mount Table Mount Manual Workstations Spur Tracks Compact Loops
Transfer Pallet Guidance Central or Side guidance
Custom transport belt heights and track lengths are available on request
Pallet Positioning Accuracy ndash X-Y DirectionPallet Stop +- 002 mm (00008 in)
Drive for Linear Tracks amp CornersAC-motor with gearbox
bull Select left or right runningbullTemperature Range 10 40 degCbull Protection Class IP54bull External Fusing 8 A
Linear Track Drive Unit (Double belt)Performance 90 WStandard Voltage 208 VAC 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhStationary Load Capacity per Linear Drive 60 kg (max) Standard Belt speed 251 mms144mminOther speeds available upon request
Corner Drive Unit (Single Belt)Performance 25 WStandard Voltage 208 V 60 Hz 075 A 3 PhAvailable 400 VAC 50 Hz 15 A 30 PhBelt speed Standard 300 mms (18mmin)
Linear Track Drive UnitStandard
405
1900
1000
745
Ope
ratin
g si
de
B + 10
100 plusmn
30
1000
255
System Specifications
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
HFL 2002-S Specifications amp Technical Data 10-2
Technical Data
SECPER PRT
PER MIN
100 EFF
PER HR
100 EFF
PER HR
85 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
100 EFF
PER SHIFT(8 HR)
85 EFF
PER MO(22 DAYS)85 EFF
PER YR(250 DAYS)85 EFF
1 60 3600 3060 28800 24480 538560 612000012 50 3000 2550 24000 20400 448800 510000015 40 2400 2040 19200 16320 359040 40800002 30 1800 1530 14400 12240 269280 3060000
25 24 1440 1224 11520 9792 215424 24480003 20 1200 1020 9600 8160 179520 2040000
35 171 1029 874 8229 6994 153874 17485714 15 900 765 7200 6120 134640 1530000
45 133 800 680 6400 5440 119680 13600005 12 720 612 5760 4896 107712 12240006 10 600 510 4800 4080 89760 10200007 86 514 437 4114 3497 76937 8742868 75 450 383 3600 3060 67320 7650009 67 400 340 3200 2720 59840 68000010 6 360 306 2880 2448 53856 61200011 55 327 278 2618 2225 48960 55636412 5 300 255 2400 2040 44880 51000013 46 277 235 2215 1883 41428 47076914 43 257 219 2057 1749 38469 43714315 4 240 204 1920 1632 35904 40800016 38 225 191 1800 1530 33660 38250017 35 212 180 1694 1440 31680 36000018 33 200 170 1600 1360 29920 34000019 32 189 161 1516 1288 28345 32210520 3 180 153 1440 1224 26928 306000
Maximum Permissible Loads
Linear Track Drive Loadingbull The Load is the combined weight of pallets including
fixtures and parts over the span of a linear track sectionbull Combined maximum load per linear track drive 60 kg (132
lb)bull Drive load may be contained on a single pallet or
distributed over multiple pallets
Maximum Pallet Weightbull Pallet weight is the combined weight of pallet fixture and
parts being transportedbull Maximum pallet weight 12 kgf (264 lbf)
Maximum Weight of Pallets Backed up at Pallet Stopbull The number of pallets backed up at a single Pallet Stop
must be limited based on loadbull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a standard Pallet
Stop 70 kgf (154 lbf)bull Total weight of all pallets backed up at a heavy duty Pallet
Stop 120 kgf (264 lbf)
Cycle Time vs Production Rate
Calculate production volumes based onvarious cycle timesOrDerive machine cycle times based onproduction volume requirements
This information will help you to determinehow many work pieces will be needed on apallet to meet cycle time requirements Thisin turn will determine the pallet size required(Section 2)
- Slide Number 1
- 01-Overview02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 02-Pallets02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- ADP1CFAtmp
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
-
- 04-Corners02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
-
- 05-Gating Systems02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
- Slide Number 8
- Slide Number 9
- Slide Number 10
-
- 06-Pallet Stops_Lifts02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
- Slide Number 3
- Slide Number 4
- Slide Number 5
- Slide Number 6
- Slide Number 7
-
- 07-Station Modules02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 08-Manual Workstations02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 09-Accessories amp Controls02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-
- 10-Specs amp Technical Data02-S 2016pdf
-
- Slide Number 1
- Slide Number 2
-